You are on page 1of 145

List Manual

Converter

SINAMICS G180
Type 6SE01??0

Edition 09/2017 www.siemens.com/drives


26.09.2017 15:34
V1.01
Introduction 1

Safety instructions 2

Description 3
Converter
Parameterizing 4
SINAMICS G180
Type 6SE01??0 A
Service & Support

Additional information B
List Manual

List of abbreviations C

Parameter overview D

Edition 09/2017
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or
approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in
this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.

Siemens AG Document order number: 4BS0550E-002 Copyright © Siemens AG 2017.


Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 09/2017 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents

1 Introduction...................................................................................................................................................9
2 Safety instructions......................................................................................................................................11
2.1 Security information...............................................................................................................11
3 Description..................................................................................................................................................13
3.1 Operating functions of the FI..................................................................................................13
3.1.1 State diagram.........................................................................................................................13
3.1.2 Relevant parameters..............................................................................................................15
3.1.3 Logical states.........................................................................................................................16
3.1.3.1 Main contactor functions........................................................................................................16
3.1.4 Control program.....................................................................................................................19
3.1.5 Status transitions....................................................................................................................20
3.1.6 Status description...................................................................................................................21
3.1.7 Operator commands – operating sources..............................................................................21
3.1.8 Parameter assignment of the operating functions..................................................................22
3.1.9 Operator function emergency stop.........................................................................................27
3.2 Closed-loop control related functions.....................................................................................27
3.2.1 Motor types............................................................................................................................27
3.2.2 Sensorless control for ASM, motor type = "async_SVC".......................................................28
3.2.3 Field-oriented control for ASM, motor type = "async_FOC"...................................................28
3.2.3.1 Field weakening with the maximum possible output voltage.................................................28
3.2.3.2 Field weakening with the maximum possible dynamic response...........................................29
3.2.4 Field-oriented control for permanent magnet synchronous machines...................................29
3.2.4.1 Encoder calibration................................................................................................................29
3.2.4.2 Starting operation after re-initialization...................................................................................30
3.3 Fieldbus..................................................................................................................................30
3.3.1 Relevant actual values for fieldbuses.....................................................................................30
3.3.2 PROFIBUS.............................................................................................................................32
3.3.2.1 Replacement/equivalent for T03 or T05 or T76/86................................................................33
3.3.2.2 Data types..............................................................................................................................34
3.3.3 Modbus RTU/TCP..................................................................................................................35
3.3.3.1 Assigning PZD values to Modbus addresses.........................................................................36
3.3.3.2 Assignment schematic of the IN and OUT data (process data) for Modbus..........................37
3.3.3.3 Modbus function codes..........................................................................................................38
3.3.3.4 Modbus RTU..........................................................................................................................38
3.3.3.5 Modbus TCP/IP......................................................................................................................39
3.3.4 CANopen................................................................................................................................39
3.3.5 Data normalization.................................................................................................................39
3.3.5.1 PZD-IN data...........................................................................................................................39
3.3.5.2 PZD-OUT data.......................................................................................................................43
4 Parameterizing...........................................................................................................................................45
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization.................................................45
4.1.1 Control modes........................................................................................................................45

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 5
Table of contents

4.1.1.1 Control modes MSC...............................................................................................................45


4.1.2 Setpoint input and normalization............................................................................................46
4.1.3 Setpoint path MSC.................................................................................................................47
4.1.4 Speed default.........................................................................................................................48
4.1.5 Process control......................................................................................................................48
4.1.6 Torque control........................................................................................................................50
4.1.7 Current control.......................................................................................................................51
4.1.7.1 Special issue for setting, load = 2DC.....................................................................................52
4.1.7.2 Special issue for setting, load = 2AC.....................................................................................52
4.1.8 Voltage control.......................................................................................................................52
4.1.9 Lifting gear.............................................................................................................................53
4.1.9.1 Properties for operation with actual value feedback..............................................................53
4.1.9.2 Properties of the brake without actual value feedback...........................................................54
4.1.9.3 Example for parameterizing lifting gear..................................................................................54
4.1.10 Mains syn...............................................................................................................................55
4.1.10.1 Operating principle.................................................................................................................56
4.1.11 P-f-torque rise ("Decanter")....................................................................................................56
4.2 Device behavior.....................................................................................................................57
4.2.1 Limiting function.....................................................................................................................57
4.2.2 Torque ramp when switching off............................................................................................58
4.2.3 Current limitation....................................................................................................................60
4.2.3.1 Current limitation MSC...........................................................................................................60
4.2.4 Fault suppression...................................................................................................................63
4.2.5 Mains buffering.......................................................................................................................64
4.2.6 Operating hours counter........................................................................................................65
4.2.7 Significance of the actual value "Comm. fault".......................................................................65
4.2.8 Significance of the actual value "MELD_NAMUR".................................................................67
4.2.9 Significance, control DSP and status DSP in the event memory...........................................67
4.2.10 Taking into account the motor losses when calculating P motor and T motor.......................69
4.2.11 Umrichterinternes Oszilloskop...............................................................................................69
4.3 Temperature management.....................................................................................................70
4.3.1 Thermal monitoring................................................................................................................70
4.3.2 Cabinet heating......................................................................................................................71
4.3.3 Cooling water heating............................................................................................................71
4.3.4 Fan control.............................................................................................................................71
4.3.5 Fan monitoring for cabinet units.............................................................................................73
4.4 Special commissioning tools and information........................................................................73
4.4.1 Checking the internal release type.........................................................................................73
4.4.2 Checking the terminal inputs..................................................................................................74
4.4.3 Inverter replacement – parameter transfer using IMS............................................................75
4.4.4 Temperature sensor evaluation.............................................................................................76
A Service & Support.......................................................................................................................................77
A.1 Siemens Industry Online Support..........................................................................................77
A.2 Contacts in Ruhstorf an der Rott location (Germany)............................................................77
B Additional information.................................................................................................................................79
B.1 Parameter/actual value data from the IMS software..............................................................79
B.2 Freely selectable setpoint units..............................................................................................80

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


6 List Manual 09/2017
Table of contents

B.3 Display format, conversion index and variable index.............................................................81


B.3.1 Display format........................................................................................................................81
B.3.2 Variable index........................................................................................................................81
B.3.3 Conversion index...................................................................................................................82
B.4 Parameter selection for the parameter switch........................................................................83
B.5 Analog signal accuracy..........................................................................................................84
B.5.1 Analog inputs.........................................................................................................................84
B.5.2 Analog outputs.......................................................................................................................84
C List of abbreviations....................................................................................................................................85
D Parameter overview....................................................................................................................................87
Index...........................................................................................................................................................89

Tables

Table 3-1 Exiting the switch interlock..........................................................................................................15


Table 3-2 Operator commands required to close a main contactor............................................................15
Table 3-3 "MCfunc" = "inactive" or all motor contactor settings..................................................................17
Table 3-4 "MCfunc" = "LinC no fault"...........................................................................................................17
Table 3-5 "MCfunc" = "LinC sw. on"............................................................................................................18
Table 3-6 "MCfunc" = "LinC rdy.f.op"..........................................................................................................18
Table 3-7 "MCfunc" = "LinC rel.f.op"...........................................................................................................18
Table 3-8 "MCfunc" = "LinC operat."...........................................................................................................19
Table 3-9 Control program..........................................................................................................................19
Table 3-10 Status transitions.........................................................................................................................20
Table 3-11 Inverter statuses..........................................................................................................................21
Table 3-12 Bits to display a control program.................................................................................................21
Table 3-13 Assignment of operator commands to operating sources...........................................................21
Table 3-14 Operator commands that are always active................................................................................22
Table 3-15 Operating functions.....................................................................................................................23
Table 3-16 Operator function emergency stop in comparison.......................................................................27
Table 3-17 Automatic encoder calibration.....................................................................................................29
Table 3-18 Parameter "BUS".........................................................................................................................31
Table 3-19 Parameter "BUS status"..............................................................................................................31
Table 3-20 Parameter "CAN‑Err"..................................................................................................................32
Table 3-21 Supported Modbus function codes..............................................................................................38
Table 3-22 Error responses (exception codes) ............................................................................................38
Table 3-23 Supported subfunction codes......................................................................................................38
Table 3-24 Status value "P‑ZSW1", default setting.......................................................................................40
Table 3-25 Control value "STW 1", default setting........................................................................................43
Table 4-1 Clock frequency limit of various device sizes/ratings..................................................................63

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 7
Table of contents

Table 4-2 Effect of the setting options for fault suppression........................................................................63


Table 4-3 Additional measures in addition to fault suppression..................................................................64
Table 4-4 Actual value "Comm. fault" for cabinet units...............................................................................66
Table 4-5 Fault messages and warning messages.....................................................................................66
Table 4-6 Actual value "MELD_NAMUR"....................................................................................................67
Table 4-7 Control DSP................................................................................................................................67
Table 4-8 Status DSP..................................................................................................................................68
Table 4-9 Parameters that are relevant when calculating motor losses......................................................69
Table 4-10 "Osci" and its meanings..............................................................................................................69
Table 4-11 Bits in the bitpool.........................................................................................................................71
Table 4-12 Fan behaves as a function of actual values................................................................................72
Table 4-13 Temperature setting value Td.....................................................................................................72
Table 4-14 "RlsMode" and its meanings.......................................................................................................74
Table 4-15 Parameters that are not transferred............................................................................................75
Table B-1 Setpoint unit................................................................................................................................80
Table B-2 Display format.............................................................................................................................81
Table B-3 PROFIBUS variable indices........................................................................................................81
Table B-4 Fieldbus conversion indices........................................................................................................82
Table B-5 Parameters that can be switched over........................................................................................83

Figures

Figure 3-1 State diagram..............................................................................................................................14


Figure 3-2 Overview of the bit functions.......................................................................................................26
Figure 3-3 PROFIBUS PPO types................................................................................................................34
Figure 3-4 Modbus map................................................................................................................................36
Figure 3-5 PZD IN.........................................................................................................................................37
Figure 3-6 PZD OUT.....................................................................................................................................37
Figure 4-1 Setpoint and actual value path....................................................................................................47
Figure 4-2 Torque ramp................................................................................................................................59
Figure 4-3 Reducing the current limit............................................................................................................61

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


8 List Manual 09/2017
Introduction 1
This document is applicable for SINAMICS G180 T7 (not capable of energy recovery), Order
number "6SE01…", from software version 11C0242/BU67.

Menu text
"P-DRIVE DATA"
Text is displayed that is also displayed on the operator panel and in the menu structure of the
Inverter Management Software "IMS".
If you have to branch in a menu, the text will be shown as follows: "P-EXTRAS/Language".
Where "P-EXTRAS" symbolizes the main menu and "Language" the submenu. In this case,
you configure the language in the "P-EXTRAS" menu.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 9
Introduction

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


10 List Manual 09/2017
Safety instructions 2
WARNING
Undesirable machine response
The machine can respond undesirably as a result of incorrect or modified parameterization.
This can result in death, serious injury or material damage.
● Protect the parameterization (parameter assignments) against unauthorized access.
● Read and carefully follow the instructions in this document and all of the relevant
documents.
● If necessary, contact our Service Center (Page 77).

2.1 Security information


Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines, and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions only form one element of such a concept.
Customer is responsible to prevent unauthorized access to its plants, systems, machines and
networks. Systems, machines and components should only be connected to the enterprise
network or the internet if and to the extent necessary and with appropriate security measures
(e.g. use of firewalls and network segmentation) in place.
Additionally, Siemens’ guidance on appropriate security measures should be taken into
account. For more information about industrial security, please visit:

http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more secure.
Siemens strongly recommends to apply product updates as soon as available and to always
use the latest product versions. Use of product versions that are no longer supported, and
failure to apply latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under

http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 11
Safety instructions
2.1 Security information

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


12 List Manual 09/2017
Description 3
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

3.1.1 State diagram

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 13
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

9ROWDJHVZLWFKHGRII
/RJLFDOVWDWH

&RQWUROSURJUDP
%&'()+,./
9ROWDJH
6HWSRLQWWUDQVIHU 
2Q
 0DLQVRII
 6WDWXVWUDQVLWLRQE\DFRQWUROFRPPDQG
$
 $XWRPDWLFVWDWXVWUDQVLWLRQ
0DLQVRII

 1RPDLQVRII

%
$%&'()+,./
6ZLWFKLQWHUORFN
)DXOW

2)) RFFXUUHG

1RHPHUJHQF\VWRS
1R2))
& *

5HDG\WRVWDUW )DXOW

'() )DXOWUHVROYHG 
$FNQRZOHGJH
() 1R2II 
 1R/6&21

1R/6&21
QRFRQWUROOHUUHOHDVH 
LQW&WUOLQKLE
/

6ZLWFKHGRQ

'()/ &'()+/ &'()+./

2))  /6&21  (PHUJHQF\VWRS  2)) 

+ ' . ,

2)) 5HDG\ (PHUJHQF\VWRS 2))


2II

6SHHG]HUR
6SHHG]HUR &RQWUROOHUUHOHDVH   UHDFKHG !  ,QWHUQDOORFNLQJ
UHDFKHG !   1R2II QRLQWFRQWUROOHULQKLELW ,QWHUQDOORFNLQJ
,QWHUQDO
ORFNLQJ

(
5HOHDVHGIRUZRUN 06&VHWSRLQW VWDUWYDOXH

&'()+./ 06&VHWSRLQW21

UHOHDVHLQKLELW
6SHHGRQ 
)HHGE0&  QRLQWVSHHGRII
 $OWKRXJK),FRQWDFWRU 06&VHWSRLQW GHIDXOWYDOXH
KDVFORVHG
)
:RUNLQJ

1RVSHHGRQ 
LQWVSHHGRII

Figure 3-1 State diagram

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


14 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

Logical state:
The FI always signals one of the logical states in the actual value "I-INVERTER DATA/Status".
A logical state can be assumed as steady-state condition.
Control programs can be selected in parallel to logical states. These are executed, and result
in a transition from one logical state to another. The previous logical state is still displayed
while executing. Where necessary, the appropriate messages are displayed.
Status transitions define the events, which occur or entries that must be made in order that a
status changes.

3.1.2 Relevant parameters


"P-INV. BEHAVIOUR/Sw.Interl."
Setting this parameter defines the conditions from when the "Switch interlock" state is exited.

Table 3-1 Exiting the switch interlock

"Switch interlock" = "Off" "Switch interlock" = "On" "Switch interlock" = "Always"


or
"Op.-source" = "BUS"
The status "Switch interlock" is only as‐ The device only remains in the "Switch The device remains in the "Switch inter‐
sumed as long as an OFF2 or emergen‐ interlock" status after an OFF2 or emer‐ lock" status after an OFF2 or after a fault
cy stop is active. gency stop. The status can only be exi‐ has been acknowledged. The status
ted using an OFF1 if the OFF2 or emer‐ can only be exited using an OFF1.
gency stop is no longer active.

"P-INV. BEHAVIOUR/MCfunc"
Here it is defined from which inverter (FI) status the FI controls a contactor – and whether the
contactor is on the line or motor side. The status is only reached from where the contactor
should be closed if the contactor feedback signal is available.
A contactor additionally connected upstream or downstream of the FI is, for "MCfunc"
designated as a main contactor. A main contactor must be controlled via a parameterizable
digital output using the "Main contactor" bit.

Table 3-2 Operator commands required to close a main contactor

"MCfunc" Fault No OFF 1 LSC ON ① Controller re‐ Speed on


lease no int. speed
no int. ctrl. inh. off
"LinC no fault" No - - - -
"LinC sw. on" No Yes Yes - -
"LinC rdy.f.op" No Yes Yes - -
"LinC rel.f.op" No Yes Yes Yes -
"LineC operat." No Yes Yes Yes Yes
"MotC no fault" No - - - -
"MotC sw. on" No Yes Yes - -
"MotC rdy.f.op" No Yes Yes - -

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 15
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

"MCfunc" Fault No OFF 1 LSC ON ① Controller re‐ Speed on


lease no int. speed
no int. ctrl. inh. off
"MotC rel.f.op" No Yes Yes Yes
"MotC operat." No Yes Yes Yes Yes

① LSC = Line-side converter


"P-OPERATION/Feedb.MC"
This setting defines from where the feedback signal of a contactor is received (source).
Terminal –X2:8 should preferably be used as this simultaneously results in an internal inhibit.
For a line-side main contactor, you do not require a feedback signal ("P-OPERATION/
Feedb.MC" = "inactive").

CAUTION
Switching at low output frequencies
For a motor contactor there is a risk that the contactor catches fire when switching at low
output frequencies.
It is crucial that you establish a feedback signal using an auxiliary contact of the contactor.

3.1.3 Logical states

The inverter (FI) is always in one of the logical states. A graphic overview is provided in Chapter
"State diagram". Inverters can remain stable in a logical state. Status transitions and control
programs define transitions between logical states. A control bit or an internal FI event initiates
a status transition.

3.1.3.1 Main contactor functions

The device statuses for the main contactor functions are described in the following, depending
on parameter "P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/MCfunc"

"MCfunc" = "inactive" or all motor contactor settings


The following table is valid for "MCfunc" = "inactive" and all motor contactor settings
("MotC no fault", "MotC sw. on",...).
For "MCfunc" = "inactive", the line-side main contactor is always closed.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


16 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

For all motor contactor settings, from the parameterized status, the motor-side main contactor
is closed. The hierarchy of the motor contactor settings is provided in Table "Operator
commands required to close a main contactor" in Chapter "Relevant parameters" (Page 15).

Table 3-3 "MCfunc" = "inactive" or all motor contactor settings

A Mains off The electronics is supplied and initialized; no fault; the mains voltage has a fault condition and "P‑INV.
BEHAVIOUR/P‑distrb.charact/undervoltg." = mains off; MSC locked.
B Switch inter‐ Mains voltage is good, no fault; FI pre-charged; MSC locked; dependent on "P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/Sw.In‐
lock terl." or for bus operation, this status prevents automatic restarting after a fault has been acknowledged
etc.
C Ready to Mains voltage is good, no fault; FI pre-charged; MSC locked; "OFF1" active
Start
L Switched on The same as ready to start, however no "OFF1" active.
D Ready Mains voltage is good, no fault; FI pre-charged; MSC locked; no "OFF1" active; "LSC ON" active.
E Released Same as ready for work and the controller has also been released.
for work
F Working All on commands are active, depending on the motor type, control mode and setpoint, the FI can pulse in
the MSC;
MSC setpoint is taken into account dependent on MSC setpoint ON; MSC enabled
G Fault FI has shut down with a fault; MSC locked.

"MCfunc" = "LinC no fault"

Table 3-4 "MCfunc" = "LinC no fault"

A Mains off The electronics is supplied and initialized; no fault; the mains voltage has a fault condition and "P‑INV.
BEHAVIOUR/P‑distrb.charact./undervoltg." = mains off; MSC locked; main contactor closed.
B Switch inter‐ Mains voltage is good, no fault; FU pre-charged; MSC locked; main contactor closed. Dependent on
lock "P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/Sw.Interl." or for bus operation, this status prevents automatic restarting after a fault
has been acknowledged etc.
C Ready to Mains voltage is good, no fault; FI pre-charged; MSC locked; main contactor closed; "OFF1" active.
Start
L Switched on The same as ready to start, however no "OFF1" active.
D Ready Mains voltage is good, no fault; FI pre-charged; MSC locked. Main contactor closed; no "OFF1" active;
"LSC ON" active
E Released Same as ready for work and the controller has also been released. Main contactor closed.
for work
F Working All on commands are active. Depending on the motor type, control mode and setpoint, the FI can pulse
in the MSC; MSC setpoint is taken into account dependent on MSC setpoint ON; main contactor closed;
MSC enabled
G Fault FI has shut down with a fault; main contactor open; MSC locked.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 17
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

"MCfunc" = "LinC sw. on"

Table 3-5 "MCfunc" = "LinC sw. on"

A Mains off Is never statically assumed.


B Switch inter‐ No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open. Dependent on "P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/Sw.Interl." or for bus
lock operation, this status prevents automatic restarting after a fault has been acknowledged etc.
C Ready to No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open; "OFF1" active.
Start
L Switched on Mains voltage is good, no fault; FI pre-charged; MSC locked; main contactor closed; no "OFF1" active.
D Ready Mains voltage is good, no fault; FI pre-charged; MSC locked; main contactor closed; no "OFF1" active;
"LSC ON" active.
E Released Same as ready for work and the controller has also been released. Main contactor closed.
for work
F Working All on commands are active. Depending on the motor type, control mode and setpoint, the FI can pulse
in the MSC; MSC setpoint is taken into account dependent on MSC setpoint ON; main contactor closed;
MSC enabled.
G Fault FI has shut down with a fault; main contactor open; MSC locked.

"MCfunc" = "LinC rdy.f.op"

Table 3-6 "MCfunc" = "LinC rdy.f.op"

A Mains off Is never statically assumed.


B Switch inter‐ No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open. Dependent on "P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/Sw.Interl." or for bus
lock operation, this status prevents automatic restarting after a fault has been acknowledged etc.
C Ready to No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open; "OFF1" active.
Start
L Switched on No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open; no "OFF1" active.
D Ready Mains voltage is good, no fault; FI pre-charged; MSC locked; main contactor closed; no "OFF1" active;
"LSC ON" active.
E Released Same as ready for work and the controller has also been released. Main contactor closed.
for work
F Working All on commands are active. Depending on the motor type, control mode and setpoint, the FI can pulse
in the MSC; MSC setpoint is taken into account dependent on MSC setpoint ON; main contactor closed;
MSC enabled.
G Fault FI has shut down with a fault; main contactor open; MSC locked.

"MCfunc" = "LinC rel.f.op"

Table 3-7 "MCfunc" = "LinC rel.f.op"

A Mains off Is never statically assumed.


B Switch inter‐ No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open. Dependent on "P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/Sw.Interl." or for bus
lock operation, this status prevents automatic restarting after a fault has been acknowledged etc.
C Ready to No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open; "OFF1" active.
Start
L Switched on No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open; no "OFF1" active.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


18 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

D Ready No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open; no "OFF1" active; "LSC ON" active.
E Released No fault; MSC locked; main contactor closed; no "OFF1" active; "LSC ON" active; controller enabled.
for work
F Working All on commands are active. Depending on the motor type, control mode and setpoint, the FI can pulse
in the MSC; MSC setpoint is taken into account dependent on MSC setpoint ON; main contactor closed;
MSC enabled
G Fault FI has shut down with a fault; main contactor open; MSC locked.

"MCfunc" = "LinC operat."

Table 3-8 "MCfunc" = "LinC operat."

A Mains off Is never statically assumed.


B Switch inter‐ No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open. Dependent on "P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/Sw.Interl." or for bus
lock operation, this status prevents automatic restarting after a fault has been acknowledged etc.
C Ready to No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open; "OFF1" active.
Start
L Switched on No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open; no "OFF1" active.
D Ready No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open; no "OFF1" active; "LSC ON" active.
E Released No fault; MSC locked; main contactor open; no "OFF1" active; "LSC ON" active; controller enabled.
for work
F Working All on commands are active. Depending on the motor type, control mode and setpoint, the FI can pulse
in the MSC. Mains voltage is good, no fault; FI pre-charged; MSC setpoint is taken into account depending
on MSC setpoint ON; main contactor closed; MSC released
G Fault FI has shut down with a fault; main contactor open; MSC locked.

3.1.4 Control program


A control program defines a complex status transition, that can extend over several statuses.
Additional bits can be used to display the execution of a control program. The actual logical
state is displayed while the control program is being executed.

Table 3-9 Control program

H Off1 The drive first goes to standstill with "Speed off". The MSC is then locked.
K Emerg. stop The speed is first ramped down to zero along an emergency stop ramp. The MSC is then locked.
(Off3) Activation of an emergency stop must be reset through acknowledgment or an Off1.
I Off2 The MSC is immediately locked. The drive coasts down. Activation of an Off2 must be reset through
acknowledgment or an Off1.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 19
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

3.1.5 Status transitions


Control bits or internal FI events initiate status transitions. However, a status transition can
also be prevented as a result of internal FI reasons.

Table 3-10 Status transitions

No Status transition Comment


.
1 Power on Power supply for the electronics is switched on, electronics initialized.
2 Off1, no Off2, no emergency stop Control commands no Off2 or no emergency stop active and FI is switched off
due to Off1.
3 No Off1 Control command No Off1 is active.
4 Controller release The controller release control command is active and the internal controller
inhibit is not active.
5 Speed on The control command Speed ON is active and int. speed off is not active.
6 No speed on Speed on was withdrawn or int. speed Off is active
7 No controller release The controller release was withdrawn or an internal controller lock issued.
8 Off1 Control command No Off1 is no longer active.
9 No Off1 The control command No Off1 is active again during control program Off1.
10 Feedb. MC = 0 The feedback signal of an FI-controlled contactor is missing, although the FI
has closed this contactor.
11 Emergency stop Emergency stop was specified by the appropriate control command.
12 Off2 Off2 was specified by the appropriate control command.
13 Zero speed reached, internal lock The control program emergency stop or Off1 has expired. Zero speed has
been reached and the FI has locked the MSC.
14 Fault occurred The FI has detected a fault and shut down
15 Acknowledge The FI no longer detects a fault and the fault memory was reset by the corre‐
sponding control bit.
16 Mains off A power supply fault has been identified and parameter "P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/
Undervoltage" = Mains off.
17 No mains off The power supply is considered good.
18 Internal locking MSC is locked.
19 LSC ON ① The control command LSC ON is active.
20 No LSC ON ① The control command LSC ON is withdrawn. Rect/LSC is locked, it is possible
that MSC is also locked.
21 MSC setpoint ON ② Setpoint release from a valid setpoint source. If no enable is active, then the
start setpoint (StartSV) is used.

① LSC = controlled rectifier bridge


② MSC = motor-side converter

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


20 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

3.1.6 Status description


The bits marked with X are not relevant for defining the particular state. In the various states,
these bits that are not relevant assume the value given in ().

Table 3-11 Inverter statuses

Bit Switch inter‐ Ready to Switched on Ready Released for Working Fault
Sta‐ lock Start work
tus
Mains off 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Switch inter‐ 1 X (0) X (0) X (0) X (0) X (0) 0
lock
Ready to 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Start
Switched on 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
Ready 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
Released for 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
work
Working 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
Fault X (0) X (0) X (0) X (0) X (0) X (0) 1

Table 3-12 Bits to display a control program

Bit Significance for bit =0 Significance for bit =1


Off1 Not active Control program Off 1 activated
Off2 active Not active Control program Off 2 activated
Off3 active Not active Control program Off 3 activated

3.1.7 Operator commands – operating sources


Under "P‑INTERFACE/Op.-sources", the FI permits various operating sources to be selected.
"Local", "Remote" and "BUS" can be selected. The functionality of the operating sources
"Local" and "Remote" can be freely programmed. For operating source "BUS", you can freely
assign the bits of control words "STW1" or "STW2" to operating functions. The relevant
parameters and/or information for the various operator control functions and operating sources
are listed in the following table.

Table 3-13 Assignment of operator commands to operating sources

Operating source Local Remote BUS


Control word is defined with
"P-PZD OUT" data STW1
OFF1 (NC) "P-OFF1 (NC)/Local" "P-OFF1 (NC)/Remote" "P-OFF1 (NC)/BUS (…)"
LSC ON "P-LSC ON/Local" "P-LSC/Remote" "P-LSC ON/BUS"
Controller release "P-Controller release/Local" "P-Controller release/Re‐ "P-Controller release/BUS"
mote"

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 21
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

Operating source Local Remote BUS


Control word is defined with
"P-PZD OUT" data STW1
Speed on "P-Speed on/Local" "P-Speed on/Remote" "P-Speed ON/BUS"
int. Ctrl.inhib. "P-int. ctrl.inhib./Local" "P-int. ctrl. inhib./remote" -
int. Speed off "P-int. speed off/Local" "P-int. Speed off/Remote" -
MSC setpoint ON "P-MSC setpoint ON/Local" "P-MSC setpoint ON/Re‐ "P-MSC setpoint ON/BUS"
mote"
Reversing "P-Reversing/Local" "P-Reversing/Local" "P-Reserve/BUS"
Reset source Local Remote BUS
Reset "P-Reset/Local" "P-Reset/Remote" "P-Reset/BUS"

If you set the reset source to global, then you can execute a reset from any operating source.
In addition to the operating functions described above, which are dependent on the operating
source or reset source, there are operating functions that are always active.

Table 3-14 Operator commands that are always active

Operating function relevant parameters


OFF1 (NC) "P‑OFF1 (NC)/Global 1"
"P‑OFF1 (NC)/Global 2"
LSC ON "P‑LSC ON/Global 1"
"P‑LSC ON/Global 2"
Controller release "P‑ContrlRelease/Global 1"
"P‑ContrlRelease/Global 2"
Speed on "P‑Speed on/Global 1"
"P‑Speed on/Global 1"
int. Ctrl.inhib. "P‑int. ctrl. inhib./Global 1"
"P‑int. ctrl. inhib./Global 2"
int. speed off "P‑int. speed off/Global 1"
"P‑int. speed off/Global 2"
Emerg. stop (NC) "P‑Emerg. stop (NC)/Bus (…)"
"P‑Emerg. stop/Global 1"
"P‑Emerg. stop/Global 2"
OFF2 (NC) "P‑Off2 (NC)/Bus (…)"
"P‑Off2 (NC)/Global 1"
"P‑Off2 (NC)/Global 2"
Main contactor feedback "Feedb. MC"
signal
Motorpoti "P‑Motorpoti/up"
"P‑Motorpoti/down"

3.1.8 Parameter assignment of the operating functions


You can freely program all operating functions for operating sources "Local" and "Remote".

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


22 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

In addition there is a higher-level parameter "P-OPERATION/opr.", which can be used to


automatically program certain predefined operating functions. To do this, many parameters
are set to certain values. The following table shows the parameterization as a function of the
"Operation" parameter.
If you subsequently change one of these parameters, then the setting value of parameter "P-
OPERATION/Opr." is assigned the supplement "spec.".

Table 3-15 Operating functions

std siss std sisd std dids std didd Namur Namur Namur Namur Namur Namur
1 2 3 4 5 6
"P-ContrlRelease/Local" always Self‐ Self‐ always
holdg. 5 holdg. 5
"P-ContrlRelease/Re‐ always -X2:10 Self‐ always
mote" holdg. 4
"P‑ContrlRelease/Glob‐ -X2:8 Selfholdg. 4 -X2:15 -X2:15 -X2:15 always
al 1"
"P‑ContrlRelease/Glob‐ always -X2:11 always
al 2"
"P-Speed on/Local" Selfholdg. 5 always Selfholdg. 5
"P-Speed on/Remote" -X2:10 Self‐ -X2:10 Self‐ always -X2:10 Self‐ -X2:10 Self‐
holdg. 3 holdg. 3 holdg. 4 holdg. 4
"P‑Speed on/Global 1" always X2:15
"P‑Speed on/Global 2" always -X2:11 always -X2:11 always
"P-OFF1 (NC)/Local" Inactive
"P-OFF1 (NC)/Remote" Inactive
"P‑OFF1 (NC)/Global 1" Inactive
"P‑OFF1 (NC)/Global 2" Inactive
"P-OFF1 (NC)/Remote" Yes
"P-Reset/Local" Res. internal
"P-Reset/Remote" -X2:14
"P‑Reset/Global 1" Inactive
"P‑Reset/Global 2" Inactive
"P‑Emerg. stop/Global 1" -X2:15 -X2:16
"P‑Emerg. stop/Global 2" Inactive
"P‑Off2 (NC)/Global 1" Inactive
"P‑Off2 (NC)/Global 2" Inactive
P‑Off2 (NC)/T1" !! OFF2 !!
P‑Off2 (NC)/T2" Operation
"P‑int. ctrl.inhib./Local" Inactive
"P‑int. ctrl. inhib./remote" Inactive
"P‑int. ctrl. inhib./Global 1" Inactive
"P‑int. ctrl. inhib./Global 2" Inactive
"P‑int. speed Off/Local" Inactive
"P‑int. speed Off/Remote" Inactive

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 23
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

std siss std sisd std dids std didd Namur Namur Namur Namur Namur Namur
1 2 3 4 5 6
"P‑int. speed Off/Glob‐ Inactive
al 1"
"P‑int. speed Off/Glob‐ Inactive
al 2"
"P‑int. Reversing/Local" Inactive
"P‑int. Reversing/Local" -X2:16
"P‑Motorpoti/Up" Inactive -X2:12
"P‑Motorpoti/Down" Inactive -X2:13
"MainsFlt" Inactive -X2:29
"Feedb.MC" Inactive -X2:8
"P‑self-holding3/On" - -X2:11 - -X2:11 -
"P‑self-holding3/Off0" - -X2:10 - -X2:10 -
"P‑self-holding3/Off1" - Res. - Res. -
Speed Speed
"P‑self-holding4/On" - -X2:9 - -X2:10 - -X2:10 - -X2:10
"P‑self-holding4/Off0" - -X2:8 - -X2:11 - -X2:11 - -X2:11
"P‑self-holding4/Off1" - Res. Release - Res. - Res. - Res.
Re‐ Speed Speed
lease
"P‑self-holding5/On" On internal
"P‑self-holding5/Off0" Off internal
"P‑self-holding5/Off1" Res. Speed Res. Release Res. Speed
"P‑Message8/Inp" Inactive MessgGen MESS 12
"P‑Message8/T1" - Interlock
"P‑Message8/T2" - active
"P‑warning7/Inp." PTC X2:28 Inactive
"P‑warning7/T" MotorWindingTemp. -
"P‑warning7/System" 0 -
"P‑warning8/Inp." -X2:29 -X2:22
"P‑warning8/T" External
"P‑warning8/system" 0
"P‑fault11/Inp." PTC X2:27 -X2:7
"P‑fault11/T" MotorWindingTemp. External fan
"P‑fault11/System" 0
"P‑fault12/Inp." -X2:13 -X2:21
"P‑fault12/T" External External
"P‑fault12/System" 0
"P‑MessgGen.MLD12/ - -X2:15
Inp."
"P‑MessgGen.ZV/0‑>1" - 0
"P‑MessgGen.ZV/1‑>0" - 0
"P‑MessgGen.MLD12/In‐ - ON
version"

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


24 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

std siss std sisd std dids std didd Namur Namur Namur Namur Namur Namur
1 2 3 4 5 6
"P‑Par‑Switch6/Inp" Inactive -X2:26
"P‑Par‑Switch6/Par" - SetSource
"P‑Par‑Switch6/AW" - MPoti
"P‑Par‑Switch7/Inp" Inactive -X2:25
"P‑Par‑Switch7/Par" - SetSource
"P‑Par‑Switch7/AW" - SetVal1
"P‑Par‑Switch8/Inp" Inactive -X2:24
"P‑Par‑Switch8/Par" - ContrMode
"P‑Par‑Switch8/AW" - Process-n
"P‑Par‑Switch9/Ing" Inactive -X2:23
"P‑Par‑Switch9/Par" - SetSource
"P‑Par‑Switch9/AW" - BUS 1
"P‑Par‑Switch10/Inp" Inactive -X2:23
"P‑Par‑Switch10/Par" - Op.-source
"P‑Par‑Switch10/AW" - BUS
"P‑Par‑Switch11/Inp" -X2:12 -X2:9
"P‑Par‑Switch11/Par" SetSource SetSource
"P‑Par‑Switch11/AW" AI1 AI1
"P‑Par‑Switch12/Inp" -X2:12 -X2:9
"P‑Par‑Switch12/Par" Op.-source Op.-source
"P‑Par‑Switch12/AW" Local Remote

Parameters designated with "-" do not change when specifying a certain operating function.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 25
Description
3.1 Operating functions of the FI

7HUPLQDOLQSXWV 3RSHUDWLRQ
&RQWUROHOHFWURQLFV *OREDO
; KDUGZDUHWULS *OREDO 32II 1&
; 36HOIKROGLQJ 
 /RFDO
;;;;
6HOIKROGJ 5HPRWH
2Q 6HW %XV
3OSHULSKHU\ ,06QRRII
; RQO\6,1$0,&6* 2II *OREDO
; RQO\'\QDYHUW7 3/6&21
;; ! 5HVHW *OREDO
2II /RFDO
5HPRWH
7HUPLQDOLQSXWV %XV
3OLQNDJHV  ,06/6&21
6\VWHPV *OREDO
)XQFWLRQ
;0000
*OREDO 3&RQWUO5HOHDVH
;0000
;0000 ,QSXW $1' /RFDO
;0000
;0000 1$1' 5HPRWH
,QSXW /LQNDJH %XV
KDUGZDUHVKXWGRZQ 25
KDUGZDUHPHPRU\
125 ,06&WUO5HOHDVH
;0000 ,QSXW *OREDO
;0000 ;25
;125 *OREDO 36SHHGRQ
,QSXW
3XVKEXWWRQRSHUDWRUSDQHO /RFDO
2QLQWHUQDO 2QH[WFWUO 5HPRWH
2IILQWHUQDO 2IIH[W&WUO
5HVHW,QWHUQ 5HVH[W&WUO 3ELWFKDQJHPRQLW WELWFKDQJH %XV
,06VSHHGRQ
W %LWFKDQJH
,QSXW /RFDO
)LHOGEXV 
67:ELW67:ELW 5HPRWH
67:ELW67:ELW 35HYHUVLQJ
%XV
30HVVJ*HQ0(66 
,06UHYHUVLQJ
0HVVDJHJURXSV
RQO\IRUELWJHQHUDWRU ,QYHUVLRQ ,QYHUWHULQKLELW 2SVRXUFH ,06
0HVV*UIOWJHQ *OREDO
0HVV*UIOWV\VW ,QSXW W 0HVVJ0HVV 3LQW&WUOLQKLE
0HVV*UIOW'&FUW *OREDO
0HVV*UIOW!7LQV
0HVV*UIOW7LQV
7'!  /RFDO
0HVV*UIOW!7FRRO 7'!  5HPRWH !
0HVV*UIOW7FRRO
XSRQLQKLE
0HVV*UIOWFRROJ ,QDFWLYH
0HVV*UIOW7UHDF
0HVV*UIOW38
3ELWJHQHUDWRU  *OREDO
0HVV*UIOWFXUU 6\VWHP 3LQW6SHHG2II
0HVV*UIW!9PDLQV
*OREDO
0HVV*UIW9PDLQV DOO *HQ%LW /RFDO
0HVV*UIW):&% 0 QRQH06& 5HPRWH !
0HVV*UZUJJHQ
0HVV*UZUJV\VW
0HVV*UZUJ7LQV ,QDFWLYH
0HVV*UZUJ7LQV 30HVVJ*HQ&203  2SVRXUFH
0HVV*UZUJ!7FRRO
$EVROXWHYDOXH +\VW 3(PHUJVWRS
0HVV*UZUJ7FRRO
,QYHUWHULQKLELW *OREDO
0HVV*UZUJFRROJ 1&
0HVV*UZUJ7UHDF
$QDORJ!
*OREDO
0HVV*UVXSSUIOW , $QDORJ 0HVVJ&203 /RFDO
0HVV*UQR21
7H[W ;; W
YDULRXVLQGLYLGXDOPHVVDJHV 7H[W ;;  ,06HPHUJHQF\VWRS
ZDUQLQJVIDXOWV 7'! 
7'! 32II 1&
0HVVDJHVLJQDOV XSRQLQKLE *OREDO
,QYHUWHU *OREDO
QRWDOORIWKHDYDLODEOH /RFDO
ELWVVKRZQ $FWXDOYDOXHLQYHUWHU
QRWDOORIWKHDYDLODEOHVHWWLQJRSWLRQV ,06RII
,QDFWLYHDOZD\V
/2:+,*+
DUHVKRZQ *OREDO
+]$FWYDO 35HVHW
%LWFKDQJH *OREDO
5G\I2Q QPRWRU &WUO$FW9DO
6ZRQ
&RPPIDXOW /RFDO
5G\IZRUN
6SHHG !
5HOIZRUN ,0RWRU 1RUP$FW9DO1RUP$FW9DO 5HPRWH
:RUNLQJ ,0RW(DUWK '&YROWV %XV
6ZL,QWHUORFN
2))
9PRWRU ,OLPLW
(PHUJHQF\VWRS IPRWRU 'HUDWLQJ06& *OREDO 5HVHWVRXUFH
!
2)) 7PRWRU W%UDNH&KRS ,06UHVHW
&RQWU5HOHDVH
6SHHG2Q
00RWI 7EUUHVLVW
5HVHW 7UO 3DUDVRXUFH 8S 30RWRUSRWL
3PRWRU 2SVRXUFH 'RZQ
5HV2))
5HV/6& 30RWI 6HW6RXUFH
5HV5HO (DUWK&XUU 0DLQV)OW
6WDWXV
5HV6SHHG 21KUV !&RPPQG )HHGE0&
,06IXQF 2SUKUV 5OV0RGH
,06IXQF 7$,
3DU6HW
7B$, 3:$51,1*6 6\VWHP
6\QFKURQ 7&38
0DLQ69 ,QSXW
6HW9 $FW9 7KHDWPD[ 3ILHOGEXV3=6:IUHHELWV
6HW9!$FW9 $GG69 7
7GLIIPD[ %LWWR%LW
'ULYH%ORFNJ 6HW9DO 6\VWHP
'ULYH5XQQLQJ
$FW9 7UHFWLIPD[
6SHHG]HUR
&WUOOLPLWUHDFKHG %866WDWXV 7FDELQPD[
$, 3',*,7$/2873876 3)$,/85(6 
*HQHUDWRU2S &$1(UU
5HOD\WRUHOD\ ,QSXW
%866HW9DO%866HW9DO$,
0RWRUURW
0DLQVRII
0DLQFRQWDFWRU %86$FW9DO ,QDFWLYH 5HOD\WR RQO\ZLWKERDUG 7
0HFK%UDNH SHULSKHUDOV 6\VWHP
)DQRQ /('DQG/('
(P$$,
(P$$, $FWXDOYDOXHVLQYHUWHU 3RXWSXWVV\V06&V\V06& ),SDUDPHWHU
(P$$,0000
QRWDOODYDLODEOH 2&;WR2&; QRWDOODYDLODEOH
%\SDVV
&RQWURO%86 VHWWLQJRSWLRQVDUHVKRZQ VHWWLQJRSWLRQVDUHVKRZQ
3RZ)DQORZ
3021,725,1* IPLQ 7$QD69
3RZ)DQIDVW QPRWRU &WUO$FW9DO 3IDXOWVXSSUHVVLRQ 5RWDWLRQ 769
&DE)DQORZ
&DE)DQIDVW VSHHG 1RUP$FW9DO 6WG6XSSU 2SVRXUFH 769
&DE+HDW21 ,0RWRU 1RUP$FW9DO ,QSXW 5HVHWVRXUFH 769
+2+HDW21 ,0RW(DUWK '&YROWV $OW6XSSU 5FW56 37FWU69&
$LUFLUF21
6\V$FWLY000 9PRWRU ,OLPLW 5FW%86 7U7FWU69&
IPRWRU 'HUDWLQJ06& %UDNH ,6HWS6RXUFH
%86JHQHUDO
7PRWRU W%UDNH&KRS 3(;75$637LPH6\QFKU )DQ ,$QD69
%86VRXUFH 3$1$/2*2873876 6\QFK7LPH
56JHQHUDO 00RWI 7EUUHVLVW ,HDUWK06& ,69
56VRXUFH 7UO 7&38 6\QFK%LW WHDUWK06& ,69
%86RIIOLQH
3PRWRU 7KHDWPD[ 3$QDORJRXWSXW &RQWU0RGH ,69
;JHQHUDO
30RWI 7GLIIPD[ 3$QDORJRXWSXW 3(;75$63RSUFRXQWHU Q6HWS6RXUFH ,IVRXUFH
;VRXUFH
(DUWK&XUU 7UHFWLIPD[ 21ELW WDFFHO ,I69
1R:DUQLQJ 2QERDUGSHULSKHUDOV
7$, 7FDELQPD[ 21KUV WGHFHO 96HWS6RXUFH
:DUQLQJ 3$QDORJRXWSXW
:UJ!5IOW0000 7B$, $, 2SU%LW 5RXQGLQJ 9$QD69
3$QDORJRXWSXW
:UJ!250000 0Q69 $, 5RXQGLQJ 969
:UJ!,50000
$GG69 $,06& 30(66$*(6  5RXQGLQJ 969
:UJ!,QY([7H 9DOXH
6HW9DO $,06& ,QSXW 5RXQGLQJ 969

37&; $FW9 8VHUDFW 7 Q$QD69 9IVRXUFH
37&; 
%866HW9DO 8VHUDFW 7 Q69 9I69
(DUWK&XUU P$]HUR
&WU!0DLQV %866HW9DO ,QDFWLYH Q69 ,FRQWLQ
6PRRWKLQJ
:UJ!5EUDNH %866HW9DO Q69 ,VKRUW
37&$, &HQWUHSRLQW
37&$, %866HW9DO 3VSFWU WVKRUW
37&; %86$FW9DO 7UVSFWU 3XOVH)UHT
33$5$0(7(56:,7&+ 
+]$FWYDO 36HWS6RXUFH 6\QFKURQ
)DXOW ,QSXW
3FWUO WUHVWDUW
&WU!)DQ0 3DU
&WU!0DLQV3K 7UFWUO 3DUDPHWHUVHW
$:
37&; 'FWU 37FWU)2&
0DLQVIDXOW
6DIHWRUTXHRII $9VRXUFH 7U7FWU)2&
3$QD69
DFWLYH
76HWS6RXUFH

Figure 3-2 Overview of the bit functions

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


26 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.2 Closed-loop control related functions

3.1.9 Operator function emergency stop


For SINAMICS G180 or LOHER DYNAVERT T and LOHER DYNAVERT XL, the operator
function emergency stop has a different significance:

Table 3-16 Operator function emergency stop in comparison

"ContrMode" Device type Response when activating emergency stop


"Speed default" SINAMICS G180 or LOHER DYNAVERT T Inverter decelerates to zero speed along the
"Process‑n" emergency stop ramp.
LOHER DYNAVERT XL The pulses are immediately inhibited. Response
the same as for Off2.
"torque" SINAMICS G180 or LOHER DYNAVERT T The inverter switches over to closed-loop speed
"P‑mains" control and decelerates to zero speed along the
emergency stop ramp.
LOHER DYNAVERT XL The torque is reduced corresponding to the tor‐
que ramp. The pulses are inhibited when zero
torque is reached. The response is the same as
for Off2.
"Current" SINAMICS G180 or LOHER DYNAVERT T The frequency is ramped down (t-frequency) to
"Voltage" "fmin". The pulses are inhibited when f-min is
"Process ‑I" reached.
"Process ‑V" LOHER DYNAVERT XL The pulses are immediately inhibited. Response
the same as for Off2.

3.2 Closed-loop control related functions

3.2.1 Motor types


The inverter supports the widest range of motor types and motor control modes. You can set
the type under "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑motor data/motor type". The possible setting
options are described below.
● async_SVC (induction motor with Space Vector Control)
● async_FOC (induction motor with Field-Oriented Control)
● sync (permanent-magnet synchronous motor PERM)
For all motor types, among others the following MSC control modes are possible (see Chapter
"MSC control modes" (Page 45)):
● Speed default (Page 48)
● Torque control (Page 50)
● Process control (Page 48)

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 27
Description
3.2 Closed-loop control related functions

In addition to the MSC control modes listed above, control modes independent of the motor
type can also be selected:
● Current control (Page 51)
● Voltage control (Page 52)
You can find additional control modes in Chapter "Control mode and setpoint input and
normalization" (Page 45).

3.2.2 Sensorless control for ASM, motor type = "async_SVC"


A motor encoder is not required for this setting. Here, it involves controlling the motor frequency
(open loop) – and calculating the associated motor voltage from a V/f characteristic with load-
dependent voltage correction. This mode can be selected for all applications where a very high
dynamic performance is not necessary. Further, it is suitable for drives with a constant load
torque and also for field weakening (max: 1:4). A significant advantage of this control mode is
the fact that typically 98 % of the line voltage can be provided as motor voltage.

3.2.3 Field-oriented control for ASM, motor type = "async_FOC"

A motor encoder is required for this control mode. Generally, an HTL encoder (2 tracks offset
through 90°) with 1024 pulses are used. TTL encoders or sin-cos encoders can also be used.
Field-oriented control should especially be used for drives that have high requirements relating
to their dynamic performance. Further, the inverter can be far more quickly connected to a
motor that is rotating (flying restart) as a synchronization routine is not required. Field-oriented
control also allows operation in the field weakening range. Especially in the field weakening
range, there are two control modes:
● Optimized to the maximum possible output voltage (approximately 98 % of the mains
voltage) with some reduction in the dynamic response (parameter "P‑DRIVE DATA/
FieldWeak" = UMAX)
● Optimized to the maximum possible dynamic performance (parameter "P‑DRIVE DATA/
FieldWeak" = FOC)

3.2.3.1 Field weakening with the maximum possible output voltage


In this mode, when entering the field weakening range, the current controller no longer defines
the motor voltage, instead, the motor voltage is open-loop controlled. The encoder information
is only used to generate the motor frequency. A very high motor voltage is achieved in this
way.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


28 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.2 Closed-loop control related functions

3.2.3.2 Field weakening with the maximum possible dynamic response


With this setting, the current controllers also operate in the field weakening range. This allows
the maximum possible dynamic performance to be achieved. However, the current controllers
require a certain voltage reserve in order to be able to operate correctly. As a consequence,
the maximum output voltage is limited to lower values. Parameter "P‑MACHINE POWER
CONV/min VReserve" defines this voltage reserve. A minimum value of 3 % is always required.
Select this value somewhat higher if you wish to achieve a higher dynamic performance.
Typical values lie between 3.5% and 5%. With a setting of 5 %, you achieve, for example, a
maximum output voltage of 98 % – 5 % = 93 % the mains voltage.

3.2.4 Field-oriented control for permanent magnet synchronous machines

This control mode is suitable for permanent-magnet synchronous machines. This also involves
field-oriented control with a high dynamic performance. In conjunction with synchronous
machines, the "field weakening range" can be used. However, it must be ensured that the EMF
voltage of the machine does not exceed certain maximum values. This does not involve real
field weakening (the field is defined by the permanent magnets in the machine), but instead,
an additional reactive current is injected. This means that a suitable voltage drop is obtained
across the leakage inductances of the machine.

3.2.4.1 Encoder calibration


This control mode requires that an encoder is mounted on the machine. You can use either a
sincos encoder, HTL encoder or TTL encoder. When using a sincos encoder, an encoder is
required with two analog tracks with high pulse numbers (e.g.: 1024 sinusoidal oscillations per
revolution, offset through 90°) and with two tracks to determine the absolute position (e.g.: one
sinusoidal oscillation per revolution, offset through 90°). For HTL and TTL encoders, in addition
to the two pulse tracks, a zero pulse is also required in order to determine the absolute rotor
position.
When commissioning the drive system for the first time or replacing an encoder, correctly set
its offset. The encoder offset specifies the offset between the encoder and position of the
magnets in the motor. Depending on the encoder and converter type, this encoder offset can
be automatically determined (parameter "Sensor adjustment rotating", parameterize "Yes")

Table 3-17 Automatic encoder calibration

Encoder type Automatic encoder calibration possible


Sincos Yes. The motor does not have to rotate, but it must be able to freely move. The motor can rotate slightly when
calibrating the encoder.
HTL or TTL No. Please contact the factory regarding manual encoder calibration.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 29
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

NOTICE
The drive will undesirably accelerate if the encoder offset has been incorrectly set
The drive can undesirably accelerate if the encoder offset is not correctly set. It is not
guaranteed that the parameterized maximum frequency is also maintained. Further, the motor
can rotate in an undesirable direction. It is not guaranteed that the direction of rotation that
has been parameterized is also maintained.
● Parameterize a fault message using the COMP message generator to shut down the drive
at an excessively high speed.
● Correctly set the encoder offset.

3.2.4.2 Starting operation after re-initialization


If you switch in the inverter control voltage again, then the response when starting depends
on the encoder type being used.

Using sincos encoders


For sincos encoders, nothing has to be observed here. The inverter can immediately define
the precise rotor position.

Using HTL or TTL encoders


When using HTL or TTL encoders, the inverter can only determine the rotor position if a zero
pulse (= pulse on the zero track of the encoder) was sent. In the worst case scenario, a full
rotor revolution is necessary.
If the machine already moves when the inverter is started, then the inverter can determine the
rotor position as soon as it has received a zero pulse. This means that the inverter can start
as usual.
If the motor does not rotate when the inverter starts, then the inverter had still not received a
zero pulse before the inverter had started – and the inverter goes into a special control mode.
The inverter feeds current to the motor so that it slowly rotates until it outputs a zero pulse.
Once the inverter has received the zero pulse, it switches over to normal operation. As a result
of this operation, generally, the motor starts with some delay. In the worst case scenario, the
motor can slightly move with the incorrect direction of rotation.

3.3 Fieldbus

3.3.1 Relevant actual values for fieldbuses


You can find the following values in menu "I‑DRIVE DATA/I-Profibus/Modbus"

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


30 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

"BUS"
Actual value "BUS" indicates the existing bus option boards.

Table 3-18 Parameter "BUS"

"BUS" Meaning
"unknown/faulty" No option board available or cannot be correctly identified.
"PB DP‑V1 I&M" PROFIBUS option board detected.
"MODBUS RTU" Modbus RTU option board detected.
"MODBUS TCP/ Modbus TCP option board detected.
IP"
"CANopen" CANopen interface according to CiA 301.

"BUS address"
Displays the BUS address used when using a Profibus, Modbus RTU or CANopen interface.
For a Modbus TCP/IP interface, the last octet of the IP address is displayed here.

"BUS status"
Displays the status of the Profibus, Modbus-RTU or –TCP, or CANopen connection or the
particular option board.

Table 3-19 Parameter "BUS status"

"BUS status" Meaning


"None" No option board available or cannot be correctly identified.
"disturbed" The connection to a detected option board is not operating correctly.
"Offline" The fieldbus communication is not OK. Cyclic data are not being received from
the fieldbus interconnection.
"Online" The fieldbus communication is OK. The cyclic data exchange is running. For CAN‐
open, communication is in the operational state.
"stopped" For CANopen, communication is in the stopped state.
"Pre-op." For CANopen, communication is in the preoperational state.

"BUS‑Bd"
Displays the baud rate of the Profibus, Modbus-RTU or CANopen connection. Modbus-RTU
and CANopen have baud rates that can be parameterized. For Profibus, the option board sets
itself to the baud rate of the control system. If, after a reinitialization by the FI, a baud rate has
still not been detected, then a value of 0.0 kBaud is displayed. The appropriate value is only
displayed after a baud rate has been detected. This value is kept – even after the connection
has been interrupted – until another value is detected or reinitialization is carried out.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 31
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

"CAN‑Err"
Displays the error state of the communication, only for CANopen.

Table 3-20 Parameter "CAN‑Err"

"CAN‑Err" Meaning
"None" The CANopen interface has not detected any error.
"Wrg. Limit" One of the fault counters in the CAN controller has reached the warning threshold.
"BUS Off" The CANopen interface of the inverter has disconnected itself from the bus. The
inverter no longer participates in the data traffic.
"Heartbeat" A parameterized heartbeat monitoring has identified an error.
"RPDO1 missing" A parameterized RPDO1 monitoring has identified an error.
"RPDO2 missing" A parameterized RPDO2 monitoring has identified an error.
"CAN Init." An error was detected in the interface initialization.
"Life Time" A parameterized Node Guarding monitoring function has detected an error.

"Modbus Parity"
Displays the parity setting with which the Modbus-RTU interface operates. Only relevant for
Modbus-RTU.

3.3.2 PROFIBUS

The PROFIBUS interface is implemented using an optional board. This is located behind the
gray plastic cover above the CB08 board.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


32 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

This PROFIBUS interface of the FI can operate three logical connection types in parallel:
1. A cyclic connection to a Class 1 master for exchanging process data (control word, setpoint,
status word and actual values) with PROFIBUS service DATA_EXCHANGE. The master
establishes this connection using the appropriate parameterizing and configuring
telegrams. As a consequence, the slave is set for a cyclic connection to this master. As
long as this connection exists, the slave rejects establishing a cyclic connection to an
additional master.
That master, which has established the cyclic connection to the slave, is a Class 1 master
for this slave.
This connection type is described at the end of this parameterizing instruction manual. This
connection type was also possible for previous software versions.
2. An acyclic connection to the Class 1 master for acyclic object access, both reading as well
as writing using PROFIBUS services MSAC1-WRITE and MSAC1-READ.
With the connection established to a master for acyclic data exchange, which means that
this master becomes a Class 1 master for this slave, then also the acyclic Class 1 master
connection is established.
3. An acyclic connection to additional Class 2 masters for object access, both writing as well
as reading with PROFIBUS services MSAC2- WRITE and MSAC2- READ. For this data
exchange, initially the Class 2 master connection must be established using the PROFIBUS
service INITIATE.
The PROFIBUS interface of the FI accepts up to two Class 2 master registrations
simultaneously. It only makes sense to exchange data with a Class 2 master, as the FI
rejects simultaneous object accesses from several Class 2 masters and issues an error
message.
Acyclic access operations 2.) and 3.) are explained in description 4BS0596.

3.3.2.1 Replacement/equivalent for T03 or T05 or T76/86


If, in a system with PROFIBUS connection, a LOHER DYNAVERT T03, T05, T76/86 or
T series 7 is to be replaced by a SINAMICS G180, then using parameter "Version", you can
set the inverter so that it can be operated in a PROFIBUS configuration with GSD file
G1800BF0.gsd.
Alternatively, you can use the GSD file of the DYNAVERT T series 7 LOHT0BF0.gsd From a
functional perspective, both files are the same. The only difference is how the participant/node
is displayed in your PROFIBUS master configuring tool.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 33
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

3.3.2.2 Data types


You can select the data type for cyclic communication using parameters "PZD‑OUT" and
"PZD‑IN" in menu "P‑fieldbus/P‑Profibus/Modbus/P‑Profibus/". If you wish to use one of the
PPO types, then this can only be simultaneously selected for "PZD‑OUT" and "PZD‑IN".
Different data types are only permissible with the settings – two words up to 30 words.

3.:SDUW 3='SDUW
3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3=' 3='
3.( ,1' 3.(3%
             

3322FWHW6WULQJ

           
3322FWHW6WULQJ

                   
3322FWHW6WULQJ
   
3322FWHW6WULQJ
           
3322FWHW6WULQJ

                           
ZRUGV2FWHW6WULQJ
   
ZRUGV2FWHW6WULQJ
     
ZRUGV2FWHW6WULQJ
       
ZRUGV2FWHW6WULQJ
           
ZRUGV2FWHW6WULQJ
                   
ZRUGV2FWHW6WULQJ

                       
ZRUGV2FWHW6WULQJ
                           

Figure 3-3 PROFIBUS PPO types

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


34 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

3.3.3 Modbus RTU/TCP

For Modbus, you address the input data words "P‑PZD IN‑data/PZD1‑10" using Modbus
register addresses 0 to 9 – and output data words "P‑PZD OUT‑data/PZD1‑30" with Modbus
register addresses 1024 to 1053. You can set which net data values are communicated via
the respective addresses (PDZ words) using parameters in the "P‑PZD OUT‑data" or
"P‑PZD IN‑data" menu. Only control and actual value data can be exchanged. Parameter data
cannot be accessed.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 35
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

3.3.3.1 Assigning PZD values to Modbus addresses

,QYHUWHUGDWD 3=',1$GGUHVV 3='287$GGUHVV


5HJLVWHU &RLO 5HJLVWHU &RLO
06% %LW3='  
%LW3='  
  
  
  
  
  
3='   
 
ELW   
  
  
  
  
  
%LW3='  
/6% %LW3='  
06% %LW3='  
%LW3='  
  
  
  
  
  
3='   
 
ELW   
  
  
  
  
  
%LW3='  
/6% %LW3='  

06% %LW3='  


%LW3='  
  
  
  
  
  
3='   
 
ELW   
  
  
  
  
  
%LW3='  
/6% %LW3='  

06% %LW3=' 


%LW3=' 
 
 
 
 
 
3='  

ELW  
 
 
 
 
 
%LW3=' 
/6% %LW3=' 

Figure 3-4 Modbus map

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


36 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

3.3.3.2 Assignment schematic of the IN and OUT data (process data) for Modbus

3=',1LQWKH),
$VVLJQPHQWFDQEHFKDQJHG 0RGEXV
WKURXJKSDUDPHWHUL]DWLRQ 9DOXH $GGUHVV
=6: 3=' 

+]$FWYDO 3='  $FFHVV


,0RWRU 3='  E\
0RGEXV
3PRWRU 3='  )XQFWLRQ

7PRWRU 3=' 
&RQWURO
QPRWRU 3=' 

IPRWRU 3=' 

9PRWRU 3=' 

&WUO$FW9DO 3=' 

&RPPIDXOW 3=' 

PDQ\DGGLWLRQDOFRQYHUWHUDFWXDO
YDOXHV
 3=' 

Figure 3-5 PZD IN

3='287LQWKH),
0RGEXV $VVLJQPHQWFDQEHFKDQJHG
$GGUHVV 9DOXH WKURXJKSDUDPHWHUL]DWLRQ

 3=' 67:

$FFHVV  3=' %866HW9DO


E\  3=' 67:
0RGEXV
)XQFWLRQ  3=' %866HW9DO

 3=' %86$FW9DO


&RQWURO
 3=' %866HW9DO

 3=' %866HW9DO

 3='

 3='

 3='

Figure 3-6 PZD OUT

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 37
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

3.3.3.3 Modbus function codes

Table 3-21 Supported Modbus function codes

Function code Meaning Access to


1 Read Coils "PZD‑IN" and "PZD‑OUT"
2 Read Discrete Inputs "PZD‑IN" and "PZD‑OUT"
3 Read Holding Registers "PZD‑IN" and "PZD‑OUT"
4 Read Input Registers "PZD‑IN" and "PZD‑OUT"
5 Write Single Coil "PZD‑OUT"
6 Write Single Register "PZD‑OUT"
8 Diagnostics (only for Modbus RTU) ‑
15 Write Multiple Coils "PZD‑OUT"
16 Write Multiple Registers "PZD‑OUT"
22 Mask Write Register "PZD‑OUT"
23 Read/Write Multiple Registers "PZD‑IN" and "PZD‑OUT"

You can access the complete input and output data area using coil or register functions.
However, as the FI uses 16 bit values internally, and even for binary words, e.g. status word
ZSW1 several bits are simultaneously evaluated, you should only use register functions in
order that a status can be uniquely identified. In this way you avoided data inconsistency.
If a Modbus telegram is received error-free, but cannot be processed, different error responses
(exception codes) can be generated.

Table 3-22 Error responses (exception codes)

Exception code Meaning


0 Illegal Function Code
1 Illegal Data Address
2 Illegal Data Value

The Modbus option board includes a function that monitors data traffic. If the Modbus data
traffic is not OK, then the actual value BUS status is set to offline, and the bus monitoring
timeout starts. For the precise function, referred to the "t‑Offline" parameter for RTU or TCP.

3.3.3.4 Modbus RTU


This option board for Modbus-RTU supports baud rates of 1200 Baud to 57.6 kBaud. Up to
10 output and 30 input data registers (PZD1 to PZD10/PZD30) can be read or written to.
Modbus RTU supports the Modbus function code 8 diagnostics.

Table 3-23 Supported subfunction codes

Subfunction code Meaning


0 Return Query Data
10 Clear Counters and Diagnostic Register
12 Return Bus Communication Error Count

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


38 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

Subfunction code Meaning


13 Return Bus Exception Error Count
14 Return Slave Message Count

3.3.3.5 Modbus TCP/IP


For Modbus TCP, the standard Modbus protocol is transferred in a TCP/IP frame. Every
Modbus TCP message is exchanged via TCP port 502. The option board for Modbus TCP/IP
supports Ethernet connections with 10 Megabit/s or 100 Megabit/s. Up to 10 input and 30
output data registers (PZD1 to PZD10/PZD30) can be read or written to.

3.3.4 CANopen
The option board supports standardized baud rates of 50 kBaud to 1 MBaud. Communication
is supported by the CANopen application layer and communications profile CiA 301.
Up to 2 RPDO and up to 7 TPDO can be used. Failure monitoring is supported by heartbeat
and/or NodeGuarding.
The data normalization e.g. control and status words is standard as for the other BUS interfaces
according to the Profidrive profile.

3.3.5 Data normalization

3.3.5.1 PZD-IN data

Cyclic data from the FI to the control are known as PZD‑IN‑data. The PZD‑IN data involve the
FI actual values. You can select analog values, text selection actual values and status words
for transfer. To do this, for all PZD positions in the menu "P‑INTERFACE/P‑fieldbus/P‑Profibus/
Modbus/P‑PZD IN‑data" select the corresponding value.

Normalization of PZD-IN data


A numerical value is transferred via fieldbus for each actual value. For text selection actual
values, a unique numerical value is transferred, which represents the corresponding selection
text.
A list of the possible settings and/or the assignment of the display text to the transferred
numerical value is provided in the IMS software. You can find instructions on how you call the
data under "Further information" in Chapter "Parameters/actual value data from IMS
software (Page 79)"
For analog actual values there is a specific normalization for transferring the value via fieldbus.
The comma is omitted when transferring numerical values. For instance, for the display
"EarthCurr" = 1.37 A the ground current is transferred via fieldbus as numerical value 137.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 39
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

The variable index and conversion index define how values that are transferred via bus must
be interpreted, for example. You can find an appropriate overview under "Additional
information" in Chapter "Display format, conversion index and variable index (Page 81)".
The variable index specifies the physical variable with its basic unit. The conversion index
defines a multiplication factor and an offset, which you must apply to the transferred numerical
value in order to obtain its correct physical variable.
General: Physical value = (numerical value * factor + offset) [unit]

Example
Earth current = 1.37 A
Numerical value via bus = 137
variable index = 22 ≥ el. current in A
Conversion index = - 2 ≥ factor = 0.01 and offset = 0
This means: (137 * 0.01 + 0) A = 1.37 A

Status word "P-ZSW1"


All bits of status value "P‑ZSW1" can be parameterized on an application-for-application basis.
The standard setting of the inverter, as is defined in the PROFIdrive profile, is shown in the
following table. Do not change the setting as this makes troubleshooting extremely difficult.

Table 3-24 Status value "P‑ZSW1", default setting

Bit Value Meaning according to the pro‐ Meaning at the converter


file
0 1 Ready to start Electronics has power and is initialized, no fault
0 Not ready to start Mains off
1 1 Ready There is no fault present and no OFF1
0 Not ready
2 1 Released for work No fault, no OFF1 and controller enableFI active
0 Operation locked
3 1 Fault Inverter has a fault condition
0 No fault The inverter has no fault
4 1 No OFF2 No OFF2
0 OFF2 OFF2 is performed
5 1 No OFF3 No emergency stop
0 OFF3 Emergency stop is performed
6 1 Switch interlock A restart is only possible using OFF1 followed by no OFF1
0 No switch interlock
7 1 Warning The inverter has at least one active warning
0 No warning The inverter has no active warning
8 1 Setpoint/actual value moni‐ The difference between the setpoint and actual value is less than
toring within the tolerance the difference parameterized at the inverter
range
0 Diff set/act The difference between the setpoint and actual value is higher than
the difference parameterized at the inverter

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


40 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

Bit Value Meaning according to the pro‐ Meaning at the converter


file
9 1 Control authority bus Bus is the operating source and setpoint source
0 Local control Bus is not the operating source and/or setpoint source
10 1 Operating state No fault, no OFF1, controller enableFI and speed ONFI active
0 No operating state
11 ... 15 Application-specific

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 41
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

6ZLWFKLQWHUORFNIURP2))DQG2))
2SHUDWLQJVWDWH UDPSXSUDPSGRZQ

6ZLWFKLQWHUORFNIURP2))
6ZLWFKLQWHUORFNIURP2))
$GGLWLRQDOGLVSOD\RI2))
$GGLWLRQDOGLVSOD\RI2))

$GGLWLRQDOZDUQLQJGLVSOD\

2SHUDWLQJVWDWH 6:(
&RQWURODXWKRULW\JLYHQ

5HOHDVHGIRUZRUN

)DXOW QRWUHDG\

6ZLWFKLQWHUORFN
5HDG\WRVWDUW

0DLQV2))
5HDG\

6WDQGDUG=6: %LWYDOXH  %LWYDOXH 

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ %LW

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ %LW

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ %LW

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ %LW

[ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ %LW

[ [ [ [            %LW 2SHUDWLQJVWDWH 1RRSHUDWLQJVWDWH

[ [  [            %LW &RQWUROSULRULW\%86 /RFDOFRQWURO

6HWSRLQWDFWXDOYDOXH
[ [ [ [            %LW PRQLWRULQJZLWKLQWKH 'LIIVHWDFW
WROHUDQFHUDQJH

[ [ [             %LW :DUQLQJ 1RZDUQLQJ

[ [ [ [            %LW 6ZLWFKLQWHUORFN 1RVZLWFKLQWHUORFN

[  [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [      %LW 1R2)) 2))

 [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [ [      %LW 1R2)) 2))

[ [ [ [            %LW )DXOW 1RIDXOW

[ [ [ [            %LW 5HOHDVHGIRUZRUN 2SHUDWLRQORFNHG

[ [ [ [            %LW 5HDG\ 1RWUHDG\

[ [ [ [            %LW 5HDG\WRVWDUW 1RWUHDG\WRVWDUW


;+
;+
;+
;+
;+
;+
;+
;+
;+
;+
;+

Status word "P-ZSW2" to "P-ZSW4"


In the default setting, the bits of status words "P‑ZSW 2" to "P‑ZSW 4" are not assigned. You
can parameterize these on an application-for-application basis:

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


42 List Manual 09/2017
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

3.3.5.2 PZD-OUT data

The cyclic data from the control to the FI are called PZD‑OUT data. With PZD‑OUT data you
can supply the FI with control words, setpoints and an actual value. To do this, for each value
select the PZD position in the menu "P‑INTERFACES/P‑fieldbus/P‑Profibus/Modbus/
P‑PZD data "from which the FI is supplied with the corresponding data.

Control word "STW 1"


For "Operating source" = "BUS", every operating function can be controlled from any control
value bit on a device-for-device basis. The standard default setting of the inverter, as is defined
in the PROFIdrive profile, is shown in the following table. Do not change the setting as this
makes troubleshooting extremely difficult.

Table 3-25 Control value "STW 1", default setting

Bit Value Meaning according to the pro‐ Meaning at the converter


file
0 1 ON No OFF1
0 OFF1 Braking along a ramp
1 1 Operating condition No OFF2
0 OFF2 OFF2 activated
2 1 Operating condition No emergency stop
0 OFF3 Emergency stop activated
3 1 Released for work Controller releaseFI
0 Lock operation Controller releaseFI deactivated
4 Not implemented Unrestricted
5 Not implemented Unrestricted
6 1 Setpoint enabled Speed ONFI activated
0 Inhibit setpoint Speed ONFI de-activated
7 1 Acknowledge (positive edge) Acknowledge (positive edge)
0 Prepare acknowledgment
8 Not implemented Unrestricted
9 Not implemented Unrestricted
10 1 Control from the AD Control word and setpoint valid
0 No control Control word and setpoint frozen
11 1 Reversing active Setpoint is inverted
0 Reversing inactive The setpoint is not inverted
12 … 15 Application-specific

Control word "STW 2"


For "Op.-source" = "BUS", you can control every operating function from any control value bit
on an application-for-application basis. In the default setting, control word "STW 2" is not
assigned. You can parameterize these on an application-for-application basis:

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 43
Description
3.3 Fieldbus

BUS setpoints "BUS setp 1" to "BUS setp 4"


The received BUS setpoints are displayed under "I‑DRIVE DATA/I‑Profibus/Modbus/". The
value flashes if "BUS" is either selected as operating and/or setpoint source – and the BUS
connection is not OK. BUS setpoints are displayed as hexadecimal value BUS setpoints are
primarily used as setpoints for various closed-loop control modes. However, you can also
output at an analog output or use it in some other way.

Example:
For setting parameter „P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/ContrMode“ = "speed", with parameter
„P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑speed default/n SetpSource“, you can select one of the four
bus setpoints using settings "BUS 1" to "BUS 4". The normalization of the BUS setpoint is
defined using parameter "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑speed default/Bus SV%". The value
entered here corresponds to 100 % or 0x4000 hex.

"BUS actual value"


The received BUS actual value is displayed under „I‑DRIVE DATA/I‑Profibus/Modbus/
BUS‑actual value". The value flashes if "BUS" is either selected as operating and/or setpoint
source – and the BUS connection is not OK. The BUS actual value is displayed as hexadecimal
value. The BUS actual value is primarily used as actual value variable for the process control
(not relevant for LOHER DYNAVERT XL). However, it can also be output at an analog output
or used in some other way.

Example:
Using parameter "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑process control/AV source" you can select
the BUS actual value "BUS". The normalization of the BUS actual value is defined using
parameter "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑process control/BusAct%". The value entered here
corresponds to 100 % or 0x4000 hex.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


44 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing 4
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

4.1.1 Control modes

4.1.1.1 Control modes MSC


The inverter makes a distinction between control modes "Speed", "Process‑n", "Torque",
"Current", "Process‑I", "Voltage", "Process‑U", "P‑Mains", "P‑hoist‑/rot. gear" and
"Mains‑sync.". The particular control mode is selected in "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/
ContrMode" or using "P‑PARAMETER SWITCH/P‑ParamSwitch".
The parameters required for the particular control mode are in the corresponding parameter
menus:
● "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑speed default" for speed
● "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑process control" for Process‑n, Process ‑I and Process‑V
● "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑T‑control" for torque
● "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑current control" for current
● "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑voltage control" for voltage
● "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑hoist/rot. mec."
For "Speed", the setpoint is interpreted as variable proportional to the speed. This results in
an output rotating field frequency that is proportional to the setpoint. A setpoint integrator limits
the rate of change of the output rotating field frequency to the parameterized values ("t‑accel.",
"t‑decel.", etc.).
For "Process-n", the setpoint/actual value input and normalization are independent of the
output rotating field frequency. The setpoint integrator is generally not active – and is only used
for starting and braking with speed OFF. Instead, a PID process controller with parameters
"P controller", "Tr controller", "D controller" becomes active. For this control mode you must
have installed an actual value transducer/transmitter for the process variable to be controlled
(pressure, flow etc.). The controller compares the setpoint and the process actual value – and
depending on the system deviation and the set controller parameters, generates a rotating
field frequency as manipulated variable. "Process‑I" or "Process‑U" behaves in a similar way
as "Process‑n". Only the manipulated variable differs: Instead of the rotating field frequency,
current or voltage is used.
If, for the process control, you parameterized "fmin", and if the rotating field is not set to both,
then "fmin" is taken into consideration. When starting from standstill, the drive is ramped up
with the setpoint integrator up to "fmin". Internally, the process controller is activated after
"fmin" is reached. When the process controller is activated, the frequency manipulated variable
(controller output) is limited to "fmin". The manipulated variable is always limited to "fmax".

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 45
Parameterizing
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

If the process should go to zero for process control with the command speed OFF, then this
is again realized internally with the setpoint integrator.
For closed-loop torque control, the setpoint is entered in Nm. The internally calculated motor
torque is always used as actual value. The setpoint integrator is generally not active. It is only
used for starting and braking with speed OFF. Instead, a PI‑torque controller becomes active
with the following parameters in the menu "P‑CONTROL PARAMETER":
● "Motor type" = async_SVC: "P T/P-R SVC", "Tr T/P-R.SVC", "P-T-ctr SVC", "Tr T-ctr SVC"
● "Motor type" = async_FOC or sync: "P T/P-R FO/sy", "Tr T/P-R.FO/Sy"
If, for the torque control, you parameterized "fmin", and if the rotating field is not set to both,
then "fmin" is taken into consideration. When starting from standstill, the drive is ramped up
with the setpoint integrator up to "fmin". Internally, the torque controller is activated after "fmin"
is reached. When the torque controller is activated, the output frequency is limited to "fmin".
The "fmax" limit is always active.
For "P-hoist/rot. gear" the inverter behaves corresponding to the speed input. In addition, a
control signal for the mechanical brake is generated – and before starting the setpoint
integrator, the brake handles the load. Further, the drive is electrically held until the mechanical
brake has closed.

4.1.2 Setpoint input and normalization


Depending on the setting of parameter "ContrMode" and parameter "n SetpSource",
"P SetpSource", "M SetpSource", "I‑SetpSource", "U‑SetpSource" and "P‑mainsSPsrc" you
can enter the setpoint at the selected location. If all ON commands are active, the inverter
accepts this setpoint and follows it, taking into account the parameterization (e.g. ramp-up
time, braking time, controller setting, limits defined by "fmin"/"fmax", etc.).
The inverter always operates internally for all control modes with normalized variables for the
setpoint or the actual value.
For control modes speed default and process control, using the "Unit" parameter, select the
suitable display unit for your specific application. Using parameter "AftDecPoint", you can
select between 5/0, 3/1, 2/2 and 1/3 integer part/decimal places to define a practical numerical
value representation. You can separately parameterize setpoint normalization (display unit
and displayed numerical value) for speed default and process control.
For torque, I, V and P-control, the setpoint is always entered in Nm and numerical values are
automatically displayed dependent on the device power. For "P‑current control", the setpoint
is always entered in A, for "P‑voltage control" in V and for "P‑mains control" always in kW.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


46 List Manual 09/2017
47
Parameterizing
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

$, $QD69 6HW9$FW9 6HWSRLQWLQWHJUDWRU


%866HW9DO SURFHVVLQJ RUSURFHVV
%866HW9DO $,
%866HW9DO IPLQ FRQWUROOHU
%866HW9DO $,
IPD[
%866HW9DO $, SUH&WU6RXUFH 5RWDWLRQ
%866HW9DO
3=' %866HW9DO IPDLQV
%866HW9DO )UHTXHQF\
3=' %XV69 SURFHVVLQJ
%86
 %86 Q$GG6RXUFH Q$GG1RUP
 +
3$GG6RXUFH 3$GG1RUP
 7$GG6RXUFH 7$GG1RUP
S69 6HW9DO ,$GG6RXUFH ,$GG1RUP
3=' 9$GG6RXUFH 9$GG1RUP 0Q69
P$
]HUR Q$QD69 ™ IPRW
$,IXQFWLRQ &KDUDFWHULVWLF $GG69 ,QWHJUDWRU
3$QD69 Q6HWS6RXUFH 
&HQWUHSRLQW 7$QD69 I693UH&W 6HW9DO WUDFNLQJ
37& P$OLPLW 36HWS6RXUFH
,$QD69 76HWS6RXUFH IPLQ
3URFHVVQ VSHHG
,QWHUQDO /,)7*($5
$QDORJ 37 9$QD69 ,6HWS6RXUFH IPD[ WDFFHOWGHFHO
'LI69
LQSXW .7< 96HWS6RXUFH 5RWDWLRQ WHPHUJ
$, $QDORJ
)FW $, 3PDLQV6HWS6RXUFH =HURSW 6SHHG 5RXQGLQJ5RXQGLQJ
3URFHVVQ
$QDORJ /,)7*(
5RXQGLQJ5RXQGLQJ

0DLQVV\Q
LQSXW &RQWU0RGH $5
5RXQGHP

3URFHVVQ
(P$$, )UH 6SHHG IQR
$, TXHQF\ /,)7*($5 ,06VHWYDOXH 2SHUDWRU IPLQ =HUR3DVVDJHIVWDUW
SUR FRPPDQG &RQWU0RGH
IPD[
FHVVLQJ
6SHHG 5HYHUVLQJ 6HW9
P$ 0Q69 /,)7*($5 5RWDWLRQ
03RWL  6PRRWKJ
]HUR 3URFHVVQ 
$,IXQFWLRQ 3URFHVV, IVNLS
&KDUDFWHULVWLF 3URFHVV9  
3XOVHDFW ,QYHU DQG
&HQWUHSRLQW 56
37& VLRQ /LPLW
P$OLPLW  6PRRWKLQJ
DWLRQ
$QDORJ 37 6HWSRLQWLQWHJUDWRUZLWK
3XOVH 6FXUYH
LQSXW .7< 6HWSRLQW
$, $QDORJ )FW 7RUTXH VRXUFH ,06
$QDORJ Q69Q69Q69 3PDLQV 6HW9DO
(P$$, LQSXW 3693693697 3URFHVV,
69769769, 3URFHVV0
&XUUHQW FXUUHQWWRUTXH
3XOVHULVH 69,69,69
969969969
&RQWU0RGH 6SHHG
)UHT &KDUDFWHUL /,)7*($5
VWLF 7RIIVHW 0DLQVV\Q
$IW'HF3RLQW $FWXDO &HQWUH %8669 9ROWDJH 7FRUUHFWLRQ
0RGH PD[SOVH 7DFKR &RQWU0RGH
SRLQW 7RUTXH
3XOVHV $FWXDO 3XOVH %86 6SHHG &RUUHFWLRQ

0DLQVHWSRLQWIRU
PRQ /,)7*(

3XOVHJHQHUDWRU
%86 0DQLSXOD
)XQFWLRQ $5
,QDFWLYH

 9ROWDJH WHGYDULDEOH
3XOVH 3UR 0RGH VFDOLQJDQG
IN+] ;

HQFRGHU FHVVLQJ 76WDUW OLPLW


IFW 5LVH 'DPSLQJ
I!N+] ;

&XUUHQW
7DFKRWUDFN ;
7DFKRWUDFN ;

7UO
([FSXOVH 6PRRWKLQJ
3U&WURQO\
3URFHVVQ
7UO
3='
%86$FW9DO
PXOW
3=' %XV$FW ™
$ N (
 + %86
3='  DGG
3='
%86$FW9DO $QD$FW 
3='
$FWLRQ
$, 3FWUO

Setpoint and actual value path


$9VRXUFH 7UFWUO
Setpoint path MSC

'FWU
$, $FW9 $FW6PRRWKJ
/LPLWDWLRQ

3XOVH
 RII
6PRRWKLQJ 3URFHVVFRQWUROOHU
I%XV 3URFHVV,
3URFHVV9
%86
%86
IVRXUFH IQR
&XUUHQW
IDQDORJ 3URFHVV,
IVNLS 9ROWDJH
$, 3URFHVV9
5HYHUVLQJ

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


3352&(66&21752/
$,
8QLW +]USP6WK6WPLQ6WV,K,PLQ,VNJK
NJPLQNJVPKPPLQPVPVK3$N3Dr&
$IW'HF3RLQW  &RQWUROSDQHO W)UHTX
0D[6HW
I69 6HW9DO 5HYHUVLQJ &RQWU0RGH W/LP /LP9DOXH
$X[69
363((''()$8/7

List Manual 09/2017


8QLW +]USP6WK6WPLQ6WV,K,PLQ,VNJK
NJPLQNJVPKPPLQPVPVK3$N3Dr& 6HFRQGDU\VHWSRLQW
$IW'HF3RLQW  )XQFWLRQ IRUSXOVHJHQHUDWRU
0D[6HW
/LP6RXUFH $QD/LP
%86 ,QWHJUDWRU
%86 %XV/LP
37&21752/ 3&855(17&21752/ 6SHHG
3URFHVVQ
0D[6HW 0D[6HW $,
/RDG

Figure 4-1
392/7$*(&21752/
0D[6HW
/RDG $,
/LP6RXUFH )XQFWLRQ

4.1.3
(P$$, %LQDU\LQIR ELW RUDFWXDOYDOXH $QD/LP
/LP69 6HW9DO %XV/LP
6HWVPRRWKLQJ 3DUDPHWHU
WRUTXH
)XQFWLRQEORFN
Parameterizing
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

4.1.4 Speed default


For "Control mode" = "Speed", the setpoint display is defined using parameter "Unit" and
"AftDecPoint" in the menu "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑speed default". In addition to the
setpoint display, all of the relevant parameters are also switched over to this type of
representation, e.g. fixed setpoints, normalization of an analog or BUS setpoint.
With the parameter setting "fnom‑M", you define the assignment of the setpoint display to the
rotating field frequency. For this parameter, you must set the value that corresponds to the
parameterized rated motor frequency (see motor data). For analog setpoints, using parameter
"nAnaSV%", you define which setpoint variable should correspond to 10 V/20 mA analog value.
Correspondingly, using parameter "Bus SV%" you define the assignment of a bus setpoint of
4000 hex.

Example
In a system, 1000 pieces/minute correspond to a motor frequency of 50 Hz (4-pole motor).
You want to enter a production rate of 0 … 2000 pieces/minute using an analog setpoint
0 … 10 V.

Solution

"fmax" = 100.0 Hz so that the drive can operate with the appropriate pieces/minute
"n setpoint source" = AI1 Select the setpoint source; connect the analog setpoint at input
AI1
"Unit" = pieces/min Define the display unit as pieces/min
"AftDecPoint" = 0 Define the numerical value without AftDecPoint with an integer
part of five
"fnom‑M" = 1000 pieces/minAssignment between motor frequency and the setpoint variable
according to unit and AftDecPoint
"nAnaSV%" = 2000 pieces/ Assignment between analog 10 V setpoint and setpoint variable
min according to unit and AftDecPoint

4.1.5 Process control


For "Control mode" = "Process-n", "Process-I" or "Process-U", the setpoint display is defined
using parameter "Unit" and "AftDecPoint" in the menu "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/
P‑process control". In addition to the setpoint display, all of the relevant parameters are also
switched over to this type of representation, e.g. fixed setpoints, normalization of an analog or
BUS setpoint.
With the parameter setting "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑process control:MaxSoll", you
define the assignment of the setpoint display and the internal normalization of the process
controller. This value also represents the maximum setpoint that you can enter.
For analog setpoints, using parameter "PAnaSV%", you define which setpoint variable should
correspond to 10 V/20 mA analog value. Correspondingly, using parameter "Bus SV%" you
define the assignment of a bus setpoint of 4000 hex.
For process control, you must have installed an actual value transducer/transmitter for the
process variable to be controlled. The actual value signal from this transducer/transmitter can
be connected using an analog input or PROFIBUS/ Modbus. Use parameter "AV source" to

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


48 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

make the appropriate selection. You can adapt the normalization of the actual value using
parameter "AnaAct%" or "BusAct%".

Example, "Process-n"
You want to control a flow.
For this purpose you have a flow measurement using an analog signal 4 … 20 mA at
0 … 1000 m³/h.
You wish to specify the control range 0 … 800 m³/h using an analog setpoint of 0 … 10 V.

Solution

"P SetpSource" = AI1 Select the setpoint source; connect the analog setpoint at input
AI1
"Unit" = m³/h Define the display unit as m³/h
"AftDecPoint" = 0 Define the numerical value without AftDecPoint with an integer
part of five. One AftDecPoint with an integer part of three would
also be possible ###,#.
"MaxSet" = 800 m³/h Define the controller normalization and the maximum possible
setpoint as 800 m³/h
"PAnaSV%" = 800 m³/h Assignment between analog 10 V setpoint and setpoint variable
according to unit and AftDecPoint
"AV source" = AI2 Selects the setpoint source; connect the analog setpoint at input
AI2
"AnaAct%" = 1000 m³/h Assignment between analog actual value 20 mA and setpoint var‐
iable according to unit and AftDecPoint

"P controller" = ###.## Set the P gain of the PID process controller as required; (1.00
means a change of the manipulated variable frequency by 1 = f
motor for a system deviation of 1 = MaxSet
"Tr controller" = ###.# s Sets integral time Tr of the PID process controller as required
"D controller" = ###.# s Sets the derivative action time (rate time) D of the PID process
controller as required

"SetVSmoothg." = #.## s Sets a setpoint smoothing function to dampen setpoint steps if


required
"ActSmoothg" = #.## s Sets an actual value smoothing function to dampen the actual
value signal if required

Example, "Process-I"
You wish to use the inverter as excitation equipment for an asynchronous a generator.
To do this, you must control the synchronous generator output voltage.
You have a voltage transformer with 10 kV/100 V.
The actual value should be displayed as %.
You want to enter the control range from 85 … 115 % (8.5 … 11.5 kV) using an analog setpoint
of 4 … 20 mA.
The excitation current of the synchronous generator is the manipulated variable.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 49
Parameterizing
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

Solution

"P SetpSource" = AI1 Select the setpoint source; connect the analog setpoint at input
AI1
"P-ANALOG INPUTS/mA- This means that the setpoint signal is set to 4 … 20 mA. The set‐
zero" = 4 mA point transmitter should be connected at terminals –X2:50-51.
"Unit" = % Defines the display unit as %
"AftDecPoint" = 1 Defines the numerical value to one AftDecPoint: ###,#
"MaxSet" = 115 % Defines the controller normalization and the maximum possible
setpoint as 115%
"PAnaSV%" = 115 % Assignment between analog setpoint 20 mA and setpoint variable
according to unit and AftDecPoint
"AV source" = AI2 Selects the setpoint source; connect the analog setpoint at input
AI2
DIP switch S2:1-4: 0010 This means that analog input 2 is set to 0 … 132 V input voltage.
"AnaAct%" = 132 % Assignment between analog actual value and the setpoint variable
"P controller" = ###.## Sets the P gain of the PID process controller as required; 1.00
means a change of the manipulated variable current by 1 = I motor
for a system deviation of 1 = MaxSet
"Tr controller" = ###.# s Sets integral time Tr of the PID process controller as required
"D controller" = ###.# s Sets the derivative action time (rate time) D of the PID process
controller as required

"SetVSmoothg." = #.## s Sets a setpoint smoothing function to dampen setpoint steps if


required
"ActSmoothg" = #.## s Sets an actual value smoothing function to dampen the actual
value signal if required

4.1.6 Torque control


For "Control mode" = "Torque", the setpoint is displayed in Nm or kNm. For a positive torque
setpoint, the inverter generates a torque that acts in the clockwise direction and for a negative
torque setpoint, generates a torque in the counter-clockwise direction. This means that for a
clockwise rotating field a positive setpoint results in a motoring (driving) torque and a negative
setpoint a generating (braking) torque. The inverse is true for a counter-clockwise rotating field.
Setting the parameter "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑T‑control/MaxSet" defines the
maximum setpoint that can be entered.
For analog setpoints, using parameter "TAnaSV%", you define which setpoint variable should
correspond to 10 V/20 mA analog value. Correspondingly, using parameter "Bus SV%" you
define the assignment of a bus setpoint of 4000 hex.

Example
You wish to implement closed-loop torque control.
You want to enter an analog setpoint at AI1 with 10 V = 300 Nm.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


50 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

Solution

"T SetpSource" = AI1 Select the setpoint source; connect the analog setpoint at input
AI1
"MaxSet" = 300 Nm Defines the maximum possible setpoint to be at least 300 Nm
"PAnaSV%" = 300 Nm Assignment between analog setpoint 10 V and the setpoint varia‐
ble corresponding to 10 V / 20 mA = 300 Nm
"SetVSmoothg." = #.## s Sets a setpoint smoothing function to dampen setpoint steps if
required

4.1.7 Current control

Two setpoints are required for the "Control mode" = "Current".


● Parameter "I SetSource" defines the source of the main current setpoint.
● Parameter "f‑source" defines the source of the auxiliary setpoint (actual value "Aux‑SV")
for the rotating field frequency.
The setpoint normalization for the current is always in A – and for the frequency, always in Hz.
You define the maximum permissible current setpoint using "MaxSet". Using parameter
"Load", you define whether a 2-phase or a 3-phase load is connected. Parameter "IAnaSV%"
or "Bus SV%" defines the conversion of a 10 V/20 mA analog signal or 0x4000 bus signal into
a current setpoint in A.
"f Analog" or "f Bus" defines the conversion into a frequency setpoint for closed-loop current
control. Only positive current setpoints are accepted. If, for an analog setpoint source, only a
negative signal is available, then this must be inverted with the AI functionality. You can also
enter fix setpoints for the current "I SV1", "I SV2", "I SV3" or the frequency "f SV1". You define
the rate of change of the rotating field frequency using parameter "t frequency" in s. This time
specifies the rate of change of the frequency from zero up to the parameterized "fmax".
For closed-loop current control, the response of the FI differs regarding some issues from other
control modes. If you parameterize a minimum frequency "fmin", when switching on the FI, the
output frequency jumps to "fmin" – and then integrates from there up to the setpoint. If you
switch off the device with speed OFF, then the output frequency integrates down to "fmin" and
there, the FI switches off. If you change the setpoint for "Rotating field" = both and an "fmin"
from positive to negative (or vice versa), then the output frequency integrates to "fmin" and
then jumps in the opposite direction of rotation and integrates up to the new setpoint. If you
change "Rotating field" from right to left (or vice versa), then the output frequency immediately
jumps to "fmin" in the new rotating field direction.

Note
Non-motoring load
Sufficient inductance is required for the closed-loop current control. The magnitude of this
inductance typically corresponds to the motor leakage inductance of a 4-pole motor with the
same power rating as the inverter.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 51
Parameterizing
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

4.1.7.1 Special issue for setting, load = 2DC


With this parameterization, the output frequency is always held at zero, independent of the
remaining parameterization. Connect the load to phases U and W.

4.1.7.2 Special issue for setting, load = 2AC


Connect the load to phases U and W. The frequency setpoint for the AC current can either be
positive or negative. However, independent of the parameterization "fmin" or the actual setpoint
input, the output frequency is always at least 10 Hz. This boost is automatically carried out in
the FI

Parameterizing example
You want to operate a heating resistor (2 phase) with closed-loop current control and a current
of up to 50.0 A. The current setpoint input is in the form of an analog value with 20 mA ≙ 50.0 A
at AI1 and the rotating field frequency should remain constant at 100 Hz.

Solution

"fmin" = 100 Hz Set fmin, so that the output frequency immediately jumps to this
value.
"fmax" = 100 Hz Set fmax, so that 100 Hz is permissible
"I SetpSource" = AI1 Select the setpoint source for the current setpoint; connect the
analog setpoint at input AI1
"MaxSet" = 50.0 A Define the maximum possible setpoint to be 50.0 A
"Load" = 2AC Set the load to 2 phase
"IAnaSV%" = 50.0 A Assignment between analog setpoint 10 V/20 mA and the setpoint
variable corresponding to 10 V/20 mA = 50.0 A
"f‑source" = SetVal1 Select the setpoint source for the frequency setpoint; enter using
fixed setpoint 1
"f SV1" = 100.0 Hz Sets the fixed setpoint to the required value

4.1.8 Voltage control


The "Control mode" = "Voltage" functions in the same way as the "Control mode" = "Current".
In this case, the FI acts as voltage source. A voltage setpoint is entered and the internal voltage
actual value is controlled to this value. The parameterization and normalization of the voltage
and frequency setpoints is comparable to that of the closed-loop current control.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


52 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

4.1.9 Lifting gear

The lifting gear function is activated using parameter "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/
ContrMode" = lifting gear. In addition, using parameter "P‑MOTOR DATA/Motor type" you can
select whether actual value feedback should be used ("Motor type" = async_FOC) – or without
actual value feedback ("Motor type" = async_SVC). Using the operator input Speed on, you
can activate that the drive ramps up along the selected up ramp and brakes along the selected
braking ramp down to standstill.

4.1.9.1 Properties for operation with actual value feedback


Operation is possible with a motor speed of zero as well as with an output frequency of zero
with the brake open. This means that electrical braking down to standstill is possible, the
direction of rotation can be reversed without activating the mechanical brake – and a load can
be accepted from the mechanical brake at a setpoint of zero. Use a pulse tachometer with a
minimum pulse number of 1000.
When starting, after opening the mechanical brake, the holding torque is automatically
determined (position control) and the appropriate holding torque established. The inverter does
not have to have a defined closing time for the mechanical brake. The ramp-function generator
is then started and a defined ramp-up from zero speed started. The drive is braked electrically
down to zero speed. The mechanical brake is then activated (minimum brake wear) and the
drive is electrically held for a parameterized time. As a consequence, the inverter does not to
have to have a defined brake opening time.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 53
Parameterizing
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

4.1.9.2 Properties of the brake without actual value feedback


● As a result of the space-vector control and the machine control used, the load at the motor
(and therefore also the correct saturation) can be determined with adequate accuracy up
to approximately 0.5 Hz – also without actual value feedback. A minimum setpoint is
obtained = rated motor slip + 0.5 Hz, however, minimum 2 Hz.
The inverter automatically calculates this value from the parameterized motor data and
uses it as start frequency. This means that for a lower setpoint the inverter does not start.
● For operation without actual value feedback, the holding torque cannot be automatically
determined, the inverter must be started with a certain starting torque. You can enter
separate starting torques for setpoints in the clockwise and/or counterclockwise direction.
Further, you can enter a motoring starting torque (positive value) or generating starting
torque (negative value). Further, you can change the starting torques using the digital
parameter switch. To avoid starting against a closed brake – and as a consequence an
unnecessarily high starting jerk – in the inverter you can parameterize the closing time of
the mechanical brake. The inverter starts the ramp-function generator after the brake has
been controlled for an appropriately long time. Using the following parameters (menu "P-
hoist/rot. gear"), you can optimize the starting procedure:

"Engag t br." Closing time of a mechanical brake


"R start.torq." Starting torque, clockwise:
"L Start.torq." Starting torque, counter-clockwise

● The drive is braked electrically down to zero speed, also without actual value feedback.
Possible brief operation with frequencies less than 0.5 Hz (necessary for a regenerative
load) is passed through, open-loop controlled with the previously measured torque. The
mechanical brake is then activated (minimum brake wear) and the drive is electrically held
for a parameterized time. As a consequence, the inverter does not to have to have a defined
brake opening time.

4.1.9.3 Example for parameterizing lifting gear


The lifting gear data are assumed to be the following:
● Closing time of the mechanical brake: 50 ms
● Closing time of the mechanical brake: 90 ms
● 4-pole motor
● HTL tachometer with 1024 pulses
● Clockwise rotating field is upward
Operating the lifting gear with tachometer feedback, the following parameterization is in-line
with what is required in practice (parameterization of the correct motor data as well as auto
R1 measurement is presumed):

"P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/ContrMode" = "LIFTGEAR"


"P‑MOTOR DATA/motor type" = "asyn_FOC"
"P‑SPEED DEFAULT/P n‑sp.ctr." = 30
"P‑SPEED DEFAULT/P n‑sp.ctr." = 200 ms
"P‑MOTOR DATA/Sensor" = "HTL"

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


54 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

"P‑MOTOR DATA/pulses/360" = 1024


"P‑HOIST‑/ROT. GEAR/t‑Engag mec. br." = 0.1 s
"P‑HOIST‑/ROT. GEAR/t‑rel mec.br." = 0.3 s
"P‑HUB‑/ROT: GEAR/P PosContr." = 20

Explanation
As a minimum, set the values for the opening and closing time of the mechanical brake to
theoretical values so that automatically determining the starting torque operates correctly and
on the other hand, the torque is maintained for sufficiently long period of time so that the brake
reliably closes.
Operating the lifting gear with tachometer feedback, the following parameterization is in-line
with what is required in practice (parameterization of the correct motor data as well as auto
R1 measurement is assumed):

"P‑DRIVE DATA/ContrMode" = "LIFTGEAR"


"P‑MOTOR DATA/motor type" = "asyn_FOC"
"P‑HOIST‑/ROT. GEAR/t‑Engag mec. br." = 0.1 s
"P‑HOIST‑/ROT. GEAR/t‑rel mec.br." = 0.3 s
"P‑HOIST‑/ROT. GEARR start.torq." = 65 %
"P‑HOIST‑/ROT. GEARL start.torq." = -30 %

Set the closing time of the mechanical brake as close as possible to the actual value. Adjust
the starting torques so that at maximum load an excessively high opposing rotation is
prevented. A starting torque of approximately 70% is ideal. Then decrease or increase the
value at full load until you have achieved the desired starting behavior.
If, for very sensitive applications, the starting jerk when operating with a small load cannot be
tolerated, then you have the following options as countermeasure:
● Equip the motor with a pulse encoder.
● Switchover the starting torques (parameters "R Start.torq.", "L start.torq.") using a
parameter switch. Information about the load must be available. Depending on the load
signal, e.g. "R start.torq." can be switched between 25 % and 65 %.

4.1.10 Mains syn

The mains synchronization control mode "Mains syn" is used to synchronize induction motors
to the mains voltage.
The following hardware is required:
● The FI must be equipped with optional PI. Regenerative feedback (energy recovery) and
PI. Mains voltage acquisition.
● The FI must be equipped with additional inductance at the output (sine-wave filter reactor)
● The FI must have an output contactor at the motor side.
● A bypass contactor must be used.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 55
Parameterizing
4.1 Closed-loop control mode, setpoint input and normalization

The FI controls the main contactor at the output using the integrated main contactor function.
The main contactor function must be parameterized for "MotC operat." A feedback signal of
the output contactor should be connected to terminal-X1:8. The message "Mains-syn." (is
available in the data pool) is used as control command for the bypass contactor. Ensure that
only a pulse is used (on button for the bypass contactor).
For this control mode, the settings of the following parameters are not taken into account –
and the following internal FI values used:
● "SetSource" = mains
● "Slipcomp" = 0
● "U‑motor max" = max.
● "Overmodulat." = max.
● "Random Pattern" = off

4.1.10.1 Operating principle


After an on command, the FI closes the output contactor and ramps-up the motor
corresponding to the parameterized ramp-up time to the measured mains frequency. The FI
then automatically controls its output voltage to achieve phase synchronism between the motor
voltage and mains voltage.
Once synchronism has been achieved, the FI outputs message "Mains synchr." and activates
the bypass contactor. The FI identifies whether the bypass contactor has really closed from
internal signals. The FI then immediately shuts down electronically and deactivates the output
contactor.
This technique has the significant advantage that the switching times of the contactors and a
load connected to the motor do not influence the accuracy of the synchronization operation.

4.1.11 P-f-torque rise ("Decanter")


The torque -dependent frequency influence of DYNAVERT T03 is called "Decanter".
In the IMS, you can find the following parameters under "P-MACHINE POWER CONV/P-f-
torque rise".
The frequency value proportional to the torque is generated when a parameterized threshold
"T-Start" is exceeded. Depending on parameter "Function", this frequency value is not take
into account (= off) – or it can be added to the main setpoint (= add on) or subtracted (=
subst.on.) (principle of operation, e.g. decanter). To generate a torque-dependent frequency
signal, use actual value "T r/l". This value is characterized by the fact that a positive value,
independent of the direction of rotation, represents a torque in a clockwise direction and a
negative value always a torque in the counterclockwise direction. Using the "Mode" parameter,
you select whether a frequency signal is obtained when the positive value is exceeded or the
negative value is fallen below.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


56 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

"Function"
Settings:
● "off"
● "add. on"
● "subst.on"
You can deactivate the calculation of a torque-dependent frequency value or select whether
the calculated value should be added or subtracted from the main setpoint.

"Mode"
Settings:
● "Torque cw"
● "Torque ccw"

"T-Start"
"T-Start" forms the threshold value, which when exceeded, a frequency signal is generated
Depending on the setting of the mode parameter, "T-Start" acts as a positive or negative value.

"Rise"
With "Rise", you set the gain in Hz/Nm or Hz/kNm, which if "T-Start" is exceeded, influences
the frequency signal.

"Damping"
In most generally encountered applications (e.g. decanter), a torque-dependent frequency
change changes the frequency initially to increase the torque This represents a positive
coupling To practically apply the torque-dependent frequency change, the system must ensure
that a frequency change – at least within a certain period of time – must result in a torque
reduction. In order that the frequency doesn't rise too high in the intermediate time, you can
dampen (delay) the frequency change using the damping parameter.

4.2 Device behavior

4.2.1 Limiting function


Using the limiting function, using a second setpoint you limit the physical output variable
"Frequency" or "torque" to an adjustable value. The limitation is applied to the absolute value.
The setpoint for the limitation must be positive. Using parameters in the submenus
"P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑speed default/P‑limit for n" or "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/
P‑T‑control/P‑limit for M", you set the limiting function differently for the internal inverter control
mode n or M. Control modes "Speed", "Lifting gear" und "Process‑n" are considered inverter-
internal n – and control modes "Process‑M", "torque" and "P‑Mains" as inverter-internal M.
Here, the inverter-internal control mode means the motor management control mode. You
cannot use the limiting function in control modes "Current" or "Process‑I" as well as "Voltage"
or "Process‑U".

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 57
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

The "Function" parameter defines the physical variable that you wish to limit. "LimSource" is
used to select the source for the limiting. "AnaLim%" and "BusLim%" define the normalization
of the limiting source – analog or bus. Similar to a fixed setpoint, a fixed limit value "LimSV1"
is available. Using parameter "t‑Lim.", you define the integration time of a special integrator
for the limiting function. This integrator prevents the limiting variable from changing abruptly
and the time that the integrator requires for changing the variable from zero up to the maximum
permissible value is parameterized.
If you switch over the control mode, e.g. using the parameter switch, and as a result another
internal inverter control mode is obtained, then the limiting function also changes. At the instant
of switchover, the integrator sets the limiting function either to the new setpoint of the limit (new
physical variable), if the new limit value is greater than the actual value of this physical variable
– or to the actual value of this physical variable, if the limit value is less – and from there it is
integrated up to the new limit value. This avoids that the physical variable suddenly changes,
which could result in control-related problems up to fault trips.

Special features of the limiting function


When limiting the "frequency" variable, the limiting is stronger than an fmin rise. When limiting
the "torque" variable, internally, the limit value is kept as a minimum at 1/8 x rated motor torque,
even if the specified setpoint would be too low for this limit.
For torque limiting for SVC, there are the special "P T‑Lim‑Ctr" and "Tr‑T‑Lim‑Ctr" parameters
for the torque limiting controller. With actual value "LimValue", the currently entered limit value
of the limiting variable is displayed in the correct units.

Application examples
Test stand with closed-loop torque control and adjustable speed limiting.

4.2.2 Torque ramp when switching off


Before shutdown with a fault message, the inverter can reduce the motor torque along a ramp.
This function is only possible in the "Control mode" = "torque" (closed-loop torque control).
The following parameters are used to control this functionality.

"P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/P‑distrb.charact./FltReact."
"Immed. off" When a fault occurs, the FI immediately switches off
"MSR ramp" When a fault occurs, the FI reduces the torque along a ramp
The ramp is split up into three segments:

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


58 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

'UHKPRPHQW

6WDUW5DPSH

=HLW
5DPSH 3ODWHDX 5DPSH

Figure 4-2 Torque ramp

Define the ramp shape using the following parameters (in menu "P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/
P‑distrb.charact."):

"T‑plateau" Percentage factor of the torque referred to the torque at the start of the ramp for
the plateau range
"t‑ramp1" Time for ramp 1
"t‑plateau" Time for plateau
"t‑ramp2" Time for ramp 2

Response when a fault occurs


If parameter "P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/P‑distrb.charact./FltReact." is parameterized on the MSC
ramp, then when a faults occurs, the torque is ramped-down. However, in exceptional cases
the MSC ramp is not executed. The hardware-related shutdown operations of the MSC inverter
are:
● Error, power unit xx
● Earth fault
● Short-circuit
● Parameterized fault via terminal input ‑X81:13 or ‑X81:14
● Parameterized fault via terminal input ‑X2:8

Practical usage of the ramp function:


Use the ramp function to protect the mechanical drive train from unnecessary stress when a
fault occurs.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 59
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

4.2.3 Current limitation

4.2.3.1 Current limitation MSC

The inverter automatically limits the current. The parameterization and operating state of the
device influence the setpoint for this current limiting "I-INVERTER DATA/I‑limit". Here, the
following parameters are relevant "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑MSC data/I‑contin",
"P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑MSC data/I‑short", "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑MSC
data/t‑short" and "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑motor data/I‑breakov".
The maximum value for "I‑limit" is the maximum short-term inverter current (this depends on
the type). Various functions can reduce this value.

Time model
The time model is determined using parameters "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑MSC data/
I‑short", "I‑contin" and "t‑short" A load > "I‑contin" is possible for the time "t‑short". The current
limit is then limited to "I‑contin". After nine times the time of "t‑short" has expired, with a load
of ≤ "I‑contin", an overload up to "I‑short" is again permissible.

Thermal model
The thermal model takes into account the actual upper temperature limit of the inverter. This
means as thermal limit, a somewhat higher current than "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑MSC
data/I‑contin" is obtained. The thermal limit is the value that the FI reaches if it is preloaded
with "I‑contin" and can then operate every 10 min for 1 min with "I‑short". "I‑short" is only
enabled again if the current limiting controller is not active. The thermal model should especially
protect all power components (reactors etc.) with the exception of the power semiconductors
mounted on the heatsink, which have no temperature sensing.
The thermal continuous current "IcontinTh" = "I‑continU" + 20 % * ("I‑shortU" – "I‑continU") is
calculated from the device data.
The time constant of the device is obtained in the form so that the thermal continuous limit is
reached after 60 s "I‑shortU" with a previous load with "I‑continU".

VKRUW9

'HYLFHWHPSHUDWXUH
GWK

FRQWLQXRXV9

VHF

Heat sink temperature dependency


Depending on the heat sink temperature (to protect the power semiconductors – IGBTs in the
inverter) the clock frequency and the current limit should be reduced. Depending on the specific

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


60 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

type, the devices have a maximum, a limit, a rated and a minimum clock frequency. Tmax is
the maximum permissible heatsink temperature.
The characteristic to reduce the clock frequency is defined by the rated and the minimum
device clock frequency. Depending on this characteristic and the parameterized clock
frequency "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑MSC‑Data/PulseFreq.", a temperature point is
obtained from which the clock frequency is then reduced. Depending on the minimum
permissible clock frequency "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑MSC data/f‑pulse min", a
temperature point is obtained, where further reduction is no longer permissible. The current
limit is reduced from this point onward.
This means that the current limit is reduced if the clock frequency was reduced from the
parameterized clock frequency value down to "f-pulse min".

PD[8

5HGX
/LPLWFORFN),

FWLRQ
FXUUH
3X
5 HIU
HG HT
OV

QWOLP
XF XH

5DWHGFORFN5,
WLR Q

3DUDPHWHUSXOVHIUHT
Q F\

LW
3XOVHPLQ),
3DUDPHWHUISXOVHPLQ

  PD[
'HYLFHWHPSHUDWXUH

PD[8
3X

/LPLWFORFN),
5 HIU

5H
HG HT
OV

XF XH

GX
WLR Q

FWL

3DUDPHWHUSXOVHIUHT
Q F\

RQ

3DUDPHWHUISXOVHPLQ

&X

5DWHGFORFN5,
UUH
Q
WOL
PL
W

7DNWPLQ)8

  PD[
'HYLFHWHPSHUDWXUH

Figure 4-3 Reducing the current limit

Additional reduction of the special control modes


With the newer IGBT modules, the IGBTs have higher current ratings than the diodes. This
means that at the load points where the diodes are especially stressed, the current limit must
be additionally reduced. For motor operation, the reduction is more than for a generator load.
For special control modes (current, voltage), the current limit is always reduced more.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 61
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

This additional reduction is realized by adding a value to the measured temperature; this value
is calculated based on the operating point (heat sink temperature). This component is individual
for every device.

Heat sink - temperature - symmetry dependency


Depending on the heat sink temperature asymmetry, the current limit is reduced so that when
the permissible asymmetry of 8 K (air cooled) or 10 K (water cooled) is exceeded, within the
next 10 K increase, the current limit is reduced from "ImaxU" to 50 %. If the permissible
asymmetry is exceeded by more than 10 K, then a fault trip occurs (shutdown). For devices
connected in parallel, that power unit is decisive for which the highest level of asymmetry
occurs.

Rectifier-temperature-dependency
The current limit is reduced depending on the rectifier temperature. In the range from 5 K up
to the rectifier shutdown temperature. The current limit is reduced from the device short-term
current "ImaxU" to the device continuous current "IcontinU". A prewarning is generated in this
temperature range.

Saturation-dependent current limit


The saturation-dependent current limit reduction should prevent the motor from stalling in field
weakening operation. Parameter "I‑breakov" is relevant. Set current limit "I‑limit" according to
the following formula:
"I‑limit" ≤ "I‑breakov" * ("fMotor" * "uMot‑act.") / ("UMotor" * "f‑act.")

Current reduction as a function of the clock frequency


You can set the clock frequency "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑MSC data/PulseFreq" higher
than the clock frequency limit. However, this increases the switching losses in the IGBT
modules so that the current losses must be reduced in order that the permissible overall
temperature rise in the IGBT module is not exceeded. This means that the current limit is
automatically reduced so that the IGBT module is not overloaded.

Note
Current reduction for the clock frequency > clock frequency limit
If you set the clock frequency higher than the clock frequency limit, then you can no longer
operate the converter with its full rated current.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


62 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

Table 4-1 Clock frequency limit of various device sizes/ratings

Clock fre‐ Device type 400 V Device type 500 V Device type 690 V
quency
limit
3.7 kHz 2T..-77401-400 … 2T..-77401-630 2T..-77501-400 … 2T..-77501-800 2T..-77601-400 … 2T..-77607-967
2T..-87401-400 … 2T..-87402-909 2T..-87501-400 … 2T..-87502-909 2T..-87601-400 … 2T..-87607-967
5.0 kHz 2T...07400-037 … 2T...07400-160 2T...07500-045 … 2T...07500-200 2T...07690-007 … 2T...07690-200
2T..-77401-200 … 2T..-77401-315 2T..-77501-250 … 2T..-77501-315 2T..-77601-250 … 2T..-77601-315
2T..-87401-200 … 2T..-87401-315 2T..-87501-250 … 2T..-87501-315 2T..-87601-250 … 2T..-87601-315
7.5 kHz 2T...07400-001 … 2T...07400-030 2T...07500-002 … 2T...07500-037 -

4.2.4 Fault suppression


Parameter "Inp." defines whether the actual level of fault suppression is determined by
parameter "Std‑Suppr" or "Alt‑Suppr". If the bit that was selected in parameter "Inp." = 0/
inactive, then parameter "Std‑Suppr" is not active. If the bit = 1/active, then parameter
"Alt‑Suppr" is active.
You have the following setting options:
● "Std‑Suppr" = "Inactive", "low"
● "Alt‑Suppr" = "inactive", "low", "mean", "high"
Using the fault suppression function you define that the various faults no longer result in
shutdown and a group fault message, but are only displayed as warning and the warning bit
is set. An entry is made in the event memory. You can select from four suppression levels.
The relevant parameters are in the menu "P‑INVERTER/monitoring/P‑fault suppression".

Table 4-2 Effect of the setting options for fault suppression

Setting Effect
"inactive" All fault trips are active.
"low" Faults, which display a fault in a temperature monitoring function, are suppressed.
1. If device reactors are equipped with a prewarning and shutdown contact (e.g. for cabinet units), an
overtemperature fault is suppressed if the prewarning contact has not simultaneously responded.
2. If a temperature sensor, with subsequent evaluation returns a temperature value that is outside the
plausibility limits (fault in the temperature sensor: short-circuit, interruption), then this fault is
suppressed.
"mean" Faults, which are not expected to immediately destroy the device are suppressed (e.g. all temperature
faults, parameterized fault functions,...)
"high" Faults, which can immediately destroy the device, which however can only be deactivated by software,
are suppressed.

In the "SINAMICS G180 message texts "document with number 4BS0576F-001 you will find
a list of all of the messages, warnings, faults and inverter faults. For each fault and each inverter

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 63
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

fault in the fault suppression column, it is specified from which level this fault is suppressed –
and only becomes a warning message. Faults that are not specified cannot be suppressed.

Table 4-3 Additional measures in addition to fault suppression

Setting Additional measure


"inactive" None
"low" None
"mean" 1. The current limit is set to the value of "i‑short". Any type of temperature or time-dependent reduction
of the current limit is no longer carried out.
2. The switch-on duration of the braking transistor to protect the braking resistor is no longer reduced.
"high" See the "mean" setting

The actual value "FaultSuppr" indicates which level of the fault suppression function is currently
active. This actual value is also entered as additional value of an event memory entry.

NOTICE
Fault suppression "high"
If you select fault suppression level "high", then faults that can immediately destroy the device
are also suppressed.

Application example
The drive of a tunnel fan must suppress motor temperature faults as, in the case of a fire in
the tunnel the motor must operate, even if the motor will be damaged as a result of the
overtemperature. Supplying persons at risk in the tunnel with fresh air and preventing smoke
from propagating has priority in this case.

4.2.5 Mains buffering


The dynamic mains buffering maintains the DC link voltage at a certain level during mains
interruption; the motor is slightly operated in the generator mode.
The drive energy required is taken from the flywheel mass.
The motor speed decreases corresponding to the ratio, flywheel mass/opposing torque. Once
the mains returns, it takes several seconds until the motor has again reached its full torque
and the system re-accelerates.
If the inverter is parameterized for mains buffering, and is being buffered, then it appears that
the mains has not failed at all. The inverter continues to operate as if the mains is available.

Note
Mains buffering
Mains buffering is only practical for large flywheel masses.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


64 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

To be able to use this function you must switchover to an external control voltage (terminals
101 and 102), and use a secured external power supply or the optional series switched-mode
power supply.
Exception:
devices up to 30 kW at 400 V or 37 kW at 500 V: If, for these types, the switched-mode power
supply is internally supplied (standard), and the rated mains voltage exceeds 340 V, then the
switched-mode power supply is buffered when the mains fails.
When parameterizing, proceed as follows: Set "P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR/bufferung" to "On" or to
"t‑restart".
For "On" the inverter buffers for an unlimited time – or until the control voltage is no longer
available. For "t‑restart" the inverter buffers for the set "t‑restart‑time" ("P‑INV. BEHAVIOUR").

4.2.6 Operating hours counter


Generally, each inverter has two operating hours counters:
● Switch-on hours counter
● Operating hours counter
As default value, the switch-on hours counter is used for the operating hours of the cabinet
fan, and the operating hours counter for the operating hours of the inverter. Both values are
available as actual values "ON-hrs" and "Opr.-hrs".
However, both operating hours counters can be used to count other types of operating hours,
e.g. an on signal, which is connected to a digital input. Go to the menu "P‑EXTRAS/
P‑Opr.counter" and select the "ON-bit" or "Opr.‑bit".
In addition, the switch on hours counter can be set to a specified value. Enter the value in
hours to be set in parameter "P‑EXTRAS/P‑opr.counter/ON-hrs."

4.2.7 Significance of the actual value "Comm. fault"


Actual value "I‑DRIVE DATA/I‑Profibus/Modbus/Comm. fault " indicates whether a message
is being displayed, and if yes, which one. These can be two-line messages from the FI – as
well as warnings and faults. If several messages are simultaneously present, then only the
message with the highest priority is output.
The actual value "Comm. fault" comprises two components. One of them is the MLD number
(the lower 12 bits), which represents the message, warning or fault, and the other component
is a system value (the upper 4 bits). The system value indicates whether the message can be
assigned to the machine-side inverter, or for multi-system devices, which system the message
can be precisely assigned to. A distinction is made between general inverter messages (no
specific assignment to an inverter system) – and the system-dependent messages (unique
assignment to a specific inverter system).

Compact devices:
There are no systems for compact devices. The system value is always zero.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 65
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

Cabinet units:
There is a system evaluation for cabinet units. The machine-side systems are designated from
1 to 7.
Possible system values include:

Table 4-4 Actual value "Comm. fault" for cabinet units

Message System value Display


General inverter message 0 -
Machine-side message, which cannot be precisely assigned to any system 0 ...MSC
Machine-side message, which can be assigned to a system 1…7 …MSC1 … MSC7

The value of "Comm. fault" is therefore obtained as follows:


"Comm. fault" = "System‑value" + "MESS number"
In the hexadecimal notation, for actual value "Comm. fault", the following relationship is
therefore obtained:
"Comm. fault"= # # # # hex
_______ __________________
↓ ↓
system value MLD number
The most significant nibble of the four-digit hexadecimal value gives the system value, and the
three other nibbles, the MLD number.

Example:
Device: 2T2A‑87602‑911 with two systems and fault, short-circuit in phase U (MLD number =
3105 = 0C21 hex) in system 2, the following is obtained:
"Comm. fault" = 2C21 hex or 11297 (= 2*4096 + 3105)

Table 4-5 Fault messages and warning messages

For all messages with the following message texts in the first For all messages with the following message texts in the first
line, the inverter has shut down with fault and the common line, the inverter has activated a warning.
fault is set:
!! Inverter fault !! !! Prewarning !!
!! Fault !! !! Suppressed Fault !!
!! Fault MSC !! !! FltSuppr. MSC !!
!! Fault MSC1 !! … !! Fault MSC7 !! !! FltSuppr. MSC1 !! … !! FltSuppr. MSC7 !!

All of the other messages are only notes and information. A fault or warning message is not
generated.
You can find a list of all of the messages with the associated MLD number in document
"SINAMICS G180 message texts "with the number 4BS0576F-001.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


66 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

4.2.8 Significance of the actual value "MELD_NAMUR"


Actual value "I‑DRIVE DATA/I‑Profibus/Modbus/MELD_NAMUR" is structured according to
the Namur directives and/or the PROFIdrive protocol. Similar to actual value "Comm. fault",
this actual value displays fault messages. Contrary to "Comm. fault", which uniquely outputs
a fault with the corresponding number, actual value "MELD_NAMUR" only outputs a fault
message group. A specific bit is set for each fault message group. The selection is listed in
the subsequent table.
Only one bit is set. If several fault message groups are simultaneously present, then only the
fault message group with the highest priority is output.

Table 4-6 Actual value "MELD_NAMUR"

Bit Bit position 1 (bit = true) Bit position 0 (bit = false)


0 Fault, inverter information electronics/software No fault, inverter information electronics/soft‐
error ware error
1 Mains fault No mains fault
2 DC link overvoltage No DC link overvoltage
3 Fault, inverter power electronics No fault, inverter power electronics
4 Inverter overtemperature No inverter overtemperature
5 Ground fault No ground fault
6 Motor overload No motor overload
7 Bus error No bus error
8 External safety trip No external safety trip
9 Motor encoder fault No motor encoder fault
10 Internal communication error No internal communication error
11 Infeed fault (central DC link supply) No infeed fault (central DC link supply)
12 Reserved Reserved
13 Reserved Reserved
14 Reserved Reserved
15 Miscellaneous faults No miscellaneous faults

4.2.9 Significance, control DSP and status DSP in the event memory
Control DSP and status DSP are displayed in the event memory as hexadecimal values. These
bit words have the following bit significance. The hexadecimal value must be converted over
to the relevant bit in a binary value.

Table 4-7 Control DSP

Hex value Bit num‐ Name Significance of bit value = 1


ber
1st posi‐ 15 Telegrammfehler Last telegram had an error
tion (left) 14 freigabeNSR No significance
13
12

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 67
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

Hex value Bit num‐ Name Significance of bit value = 1


ber
2nd posi‐ 11 Oszi_Trigger Trigger for DSP osci is given
tion 10 Oszi_aktiv DSP osci has been activated
9 sy_seksoll_ok -
8 Iwpuffern Limit active current as phase failure
3rd posi‐ 7 Staenderschuetz No significance
tion 6 resSS Reset faults
5 parameterOk All parameters have been transferred to the DSP
4 sollwGueltig The setpoint is valid
4th posi‐ 3 freigabe Bit 0 to bit 3 are interpreted as number with the following significance:
tion (right) 2 0 no enable
1 ncontrol
1 2 tcontrol
0 3 icontrol
4 motor_trappg
5 excite_motor
6 mot_holdg
7 TachoOffestIdentification
8 reduce current
9 r1_measurement
10 ≙ A synchronize
11 ≙ B dc_braking
12 ≙ C nctrl_hold
13 ≙ D test_safe torque off
14 ≙ E ucontrol
15 ≙ F Xsigma measurement

Table 4-8 Status DSP

Hex value Bit num‐ Name Significance of bit value = 1


ber
1st posi‐ 15 Free -
tion (left) 14 Free -
13 SichererHaltOk Safe torque off test is OK
12 nmi_geberoff‐ After initialization, a zero pulse has occurred; This means that for syn‐
set_ok_na ch_init chronous machines the rotor position is current.
2nd posi‐ 11 MSRRampe Torque ramp was moved along
tion 10 stromunsymmetrie Asymmetry of the output currents
9 momentenregler‐ Torque controller specifies f>fmax or f<fmin or incorrect direction of rota‐
grenze tion
8 spannungsgrenze Voltage limit reached
3rd posi‐ 7
tion 6 fehlerschnittstelle Interface error C161 – DSP
5 fehlerTacho Fault tachometer
4 toffset_autor1_ok The measurement of the tachometer offset or autoR1- measurement has
been completed.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


68 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.2 Device behavior

Hex value Bit num‐ Name Significance of bit value = 1


ber
4th posi‐ 3 motor_abgefangen The motor has been held (when opening the brake)
tion (right) 2 bereit DSP is ready
1 freigegeben DSP executes closed-loop control corresponding to control DSP (enable)
off.
0 getAllParameter All parameters should be retransferred (requested from DSP).

4.2.10 Taking into account the motor losses when calculating P motor and T motor
When calculating the actual values of motor power "P‑motor" and torque "T‑motor" the inverter
takes into account the losses that occur in the motor. The inverter calculates these values from
the motor data.
Enter the most accurate values in the relevant parameters to increase the calculation accuracy.

Table 4-9 Parameters that are relevant when calculating motor losses

Menu Parameter
"P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑motor data" "P-motor"
"n-motor"
"I-motor"
"f-motor"
"V-motor"
"cos phi"
"ETA"
"Fan external"
"P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑Motor data/P‑Equival.circ.-Data" "R1"

4.2.11 Umrichterinternes Oszilloskop


The actual value "I‑DRIVE DATA/I‑spec. val. inv./Osci" indicates the state of the oscilloscope
integrated in the inverter.

Table 4-10 "Osci" and its meanings

"Osci" Comment
"single" The inverter has no data. It waits for the trigger condition to be activated.
"waiting B1" The trigger condition is active, and the system waits that trigger precondition B1 is satisfied.
"waiting B2" The trigger condition is active, and the system waits that trigger precondition B2 is satisfied.
"waiting T" The trigger condition is active, and the system waits that trigger condition is satisfied.
"triggered" The trigger was initiated. Data is recorded. The available memory has still not been completely
written to.
"upload" The trigger was initiated, and data were recorded that are ready for upload.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 69
Parameterizing
4.3 Temperature management

4.3 Temperature management

4.3.1 Thermal monitoring


The FI checks the temperature sensor for plausibility. If a non-plausible value is identified (e.g.
due to an interrupted or short-circuit sensor), then the device shuts down and issues an inverter
fault.

"I‑INVERTER DATA/I‑Invertertemp./…

"T‑CPU"
This actual value indicates the temperature of the measuring location on board CB08. The
maximum value is 75 °C. The device shuts down with a fault if this temperature is exceeded.
5 °C prior to the shutdown, a warning is generated. If the measured temperature value falls
below -5 °C then the device shuts down with a fault.

"T‑heat max"
This actual value indicates the maximum heat sink temperature for the machine-side inverter
MSC. If the inverter has several temperature sensors, then the maximum value is displayed
here. The shutdown threshold for "T‑heat max" is individually selected for each device
depending on the semiconductor rating/dimensioning. The device shuts down with a fault if
this value is exceeded. A warning message is output, if the temperature reaches the thresholds
where the clock frequency or current limit is reduced. For the standard default
parameterization, from 10 °C to 5 °C, the pulse (clock) frequency is reduced from the rated
pulse frequency down to "f‑pulse min". From 5 °C prior to this, up to the shutdown threshold,
the current limit is reduced down to 0 A. If the lowest measured temperature value falls below
-5 °C then the device shuts down with a fault.

"T‑diff. max"
For several temperature sensors for the inverter, this actual value shows the temperature
difference of the power unit with the highest difference (cabinet units one and several systems).
A temperature difference of 8 °C for air cooled and 10 °C for water-cooled devices is
permissible. If this difference is exceeded, in the range of an additional 10 °C the current limit
is reduced down to 50 %. A warning is simultaneously generated. The device shuts down with
a fault if the permissible difference is exceeded by more than 10 °C.

"T‑rectif.max"
This actual value indicates the heat sink temperature for the rectifier (only for cabinet units).
The shutdown threshold for "T‑rectif.max" is individually selected for each device depending
on the semiconductor rating/dimensioning. The device shuts down with a fault if this value is
exceeded. From 5 °C prior to this, up to the shutdown threshold, the current limit is reduced
and at the same time, a warning is generated. If the lowest measured temperature value falls
below -5 °C then the device shuts down with a fault.

"T‑cabinet max"
For cabinet units, this actual value indicates the temperature in the inverter cabinet – or the
maximum value for several inverter cabinets (several systems). The maximum cabinet
temperature is 55 °C. The device shuts down with a fault if this temperature is exceeded. 5 °C

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


70 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.3 Temperature management

prior to the shutdown, a warning is generated. If the lowest measured temperature value falls
below -5 °C then the device shuts down with a fault.

4.3.2 Cabinet heating


The bit "CabHeat.ON" is available in the bit pool. This bit is HIGH if either the condition from
parameter "P‑INVERTER DATA/P‑cabinet heater/ON‑cond." is satisfied, or the minimum
measured cabinet temperature is less than the value set in parameter "P‑INVERTER DATA/
P‑cabinet heater/T-CabHeaterON" (hysteresis = 2 °C)

4.3.3 Cooling water heating


The bit "H2OHeat.ON" is available in the bit pool. This bit is HIGH if either the condition from
parameter "P‑CoolgWaterHeater/ON‑cond." is satisfied, or the minimum measured heat sink
temperature is less than -5 °C (hysteresis = 2 °C).

4.3.4 Fan control


The fan control depends on the switch-on state of the inverter, the measured temperatures
and parameters "Air circulation" and "Fan". The fan control has three states – OFF, SLOW and
FAST. The fan is always switched to the higher airflow rate from all relevant conditions. In the
software, a distinction is made between power unit ventilation ("T‑heat. max.", "T‑diff.max" and
"T‑rectif.max") and cabinet ventilation ("T‑CPU", "T‑cabin. max"). Separate bits are available
for this purpose in the bitpool. In the standard device, the fans are wired to the appropriate
switching devices for the three fan stages; these are switched using the LFT signal in the
inverter. Parameterization is not required.

Table 4-11 Bits in the bitpool

Bitpool bit Description


"Fan on" Fan on
This bit is HIGH if the fan control has the states SLOW or FAST for the power unit and/or cabinet ventilation.
"PowFan low/" Power unit fan slow inverted
For this bit, only the conditions of "T‑heat.max", "T‑diff.max" and "T‑rectif.max" are checked. This bit is
HIGH if the fan control is not in the SLOW state; this means that it is in states OFF or FAST. In conjunction
with bit "PowFan fast", the three fan states for the power unit/heat sink fan can be generated.
"PowFan fast" Power unit fan fast
For this bit, only the conditions of "T‑heat.max", "T‑diff.max" and "T‑rectif.max" are checked. This bit is
HIGH, if the fan control has the state FAST. In conjunction with bit "PowFan low", the three fan states for
the power unit/heat sink fan can be generated.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 71
Parameterizing
4.3 Temperature management

Bitpool bit Description


"PowFan low/" Cabinet fan slow inverted
For this bit, only the conditions of "T‑CPU" and "T‑cabinet max" are checked. This bit is HIGH if the fan
control is not in the SLOW state; this means that it is in states OFF or FAST. In conjunction with bit "CabFan
fast", the three fan states for the power unit/heat sink fan can be generated.
"CabFan fast" Cabinet fan fast
For this bit, only the conditions of "T‑CPU" and "T‑cabin. max" are checked, as well as the prewarning
signals for the inverter reactors. This bit is HIGH, if the fan control has the state FAST. In conjunction with
bit "CabFan low", the three fan states for the power unit/heat sink fan can be generated.

The condition depends on the switch-on state of the inverter


As soon as the machine-side inverter has started to pulse, all of the fans are operated as a
minimum in the SLOW state; this assumes that at least one of the temperatures relevant for
the fan control has reached the switch-on value for the SLOW fan stage.

The condition depends on the measured temperatures


If one of the relevant temperatures exceeds the limits defined for the fan stage, then the
relevant fans are operated in this stage. If all of the relevant temperatures for the fan stage fall
below the temperature limit minus hysteresis, then a switch is made to the lower fan stage or
the fan is switched off. Further, a distinction is made between power unit ventilation and cabinet
ventilation. For the power unit ventilation, temperatures "T‑heat max", T‑diff. max" and
"T‑rectif.max" are relevant, and for the cabinet ventilation, temperatures "T‑CPU" and T‑cabin.
max".

Table 4-12 Fan behaves as a function of actual values

Actual value in the Fan OFF or due to fan SLOW* or due fan FAST Effective for fans Relevant for com‐
inverter another condition to another condi‐ in: pact device
tion
"T‑heat max" ≤ 10 °C (– 5 °C) ≥ 10 °C and ≥ 50 °C PU Yes
≤ 50 °C (- 10 °C)
"T‑diff. max" ≤ Td (– 3 °C) ≥ Td – 1 °C PU No
"T‑rectif.max" ≤ 55 °C (– 5 °C) ≥ 55 °C PU No
"T‑CPU" ≤ 50 °C (– 5 °C) ≥ 50 °C and ≤ 70 ≥ 70 °C Cabinet Yes
°C (– 5 °C)
"T‑cabinet max" ≤ 10 °C (– 5 °C) ≥ 10 °C and ≤ 47 ≥ 47 °C Cabinet No
°C (– 5 °C)
Reactor prewarn‐ Cabinet No
ing

* Fan stage SLOW is only realized if the machine-side inverter MSC pulses.

Table 4-13 Temperature setting value Td

Value Air-cooled devices Water-cooled devices


Td 8 °C 10 °C

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


72 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.4 Special commissioning tools and information

The condition depends on parameter P-INVERTER DATA:Fan


Using this parameter, you can permanently bring the fan control into the SLOW or FAST states.
A "lower" fan state is then no longer assumed. The parameter is active for power unit as well
as cabinet ventilation.

Condition dependent on air circulation in the cabinet


Using parameter "P‑INVERTER DATA/P‑air circulation/AirCirc.Cab.", you can select whether
in the inverter there is an extra fan for internal air circulation (selection: yes/no). If air circulation
does exist, in the bitpool, bit "Air.circ.ON" goes to HIGH, if the internal inverter clock inhibit has
been withdrawn and either the maximum cabinet temperature is greater than 10 °C, or the
input of parameter "P‑INVERTER DATA/P‑Air circulation/ON-Cond." was activated. Further,
the selection as to whether air circulation is available influences the switch-on temperature
where the cabinet fans switch into the slow stage. For "no", the temperature in parameter
"P‑INVERTER DATA/P‑Air circulation/T-OnCtrCabFan" remains fixed at 10 °C. For "yes", you
can set a temperature of between -20 °C and +40 °C.

Condition dependent on the minimum runtime of the power unit fan


For water-cooled inverters, using parameter "P‑INVERTER DATA/t‑PU‑fan min" you can set
a minimum run time for the power unit fan in the "fast" stage. This means that if one of the
conditions is satisfied, which causes the power unit fan to be switched into the "fast" stage –
then the fast stage remains active as a minimum for the selected time, even if, in the meantime,
the condition is no longer satisfied. Exceptions:
● The minimum run time is no longer active if the minimum heat sink temperature, set in
parameter "P‑INVERTER DATA/T‑cool. min fan", is fallen below.
● If the faster power unit fan stage is only activated by the setting of parameter "P‑INVERTER
DATA/fan" to "fast" – and no other condition is satisfied, then when switching over the
parameter to "slow", the system no longer waits for the minimum run time to expire, but the
switchover is made immediately.

4.3.5 Fan monitoring for cabinet units


The fans can be monitored for cabinet units. On the signals board, input ‑X81:8 is used for this
purpose. This must be controlled for the feedback signal for fans that are running. The fan
monitoring compares the internal "LFT" signal or the bit "Fan on" with the feedback signal. If
the fans are not switched on, then the state of the feedback signal is not relevant. However, if
the fans are switched on and the feedback signal is missing, then warning No. 2997 "Standstill
fan" is generated for the specific system.

4.4 Special commissioning tools and information

4.4.1 Checking the internal release type


Especially when commissioning it is helpful to know which release (enable) type "RlsMode" is
available at the internal pulse pattern processor DSP. You can use this to check the
parameterization.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 73
Parameterizing
4.4 Special commissioning tools and information

You can find the release type under "ACTUAL VALUES/U‑INVERTER DATA/RlsMode." The
individual values have the following significance:

Table 4-14 "RlsMode" and its meanings

"RlsMode" Comment
"none" FI is inhibited; pulse inhibit; no release.
"n‑contrl" The motor is operated with closed-loop speed control.
"T‑contrl" The motor is operated with closed-loop torque control.
"I‑contrl" The output current is controlled; closed-loop current control.
"V‑contrl" The output voltage is controlled; closed-loop voltage control.
"Mot.trappg" For lifting gear; the load is taken over by the brake (is not relevant for LOHER DYNAVERT XL).
"Mot.excite" The motor is excited.
"Mot.holdg" For lifting gear; the load is held electrically until it is transferred over to the brake (not relevant for
LOHER DYNAVERT XL).
"Tacho offs." The tachometer offset is determined
"I -> zero" For lifting gear; current is switched-off in a controlled fashion before inhibit (not relevant for LOH‐
ER DYNAVERT XL).
"R1‑measmt." The R1 measurement is carried out.
"Synchron." Synchronism is established.
"DC‑Brakes" DC braking is carried out.
"T impress" The system uses the last load information determined.
"Test STO" STO function is tested
"XSigma‑met" XSigma measurement is carried out

4.4.2 Checking the terminal inputs


You can view the status (0 or 1) of the individual digital inputs in menu "I‑ACTUAL VALUESE/
I‑INVERTER DATA/I‑terminal inputs". The following parameters are available in this menu:
● "-X2:9‑16":
display of the terminal strip inputs-X2:9 to -X2:16 of board CB08. Every displayed location
represents a terminal. Eight locations are displayed. If a value of 0 is displayed, then the
corresponding terminal is not controlled. If a terminal is controlled, at the corresponding
location for terminal -X2:9 a 9 is displayed, for -X2:10 an A, for -X2:11 a 1 etc.
Example:
If terminals -X2:9, -X2:10, -X2:14 and -X2:16 are controlled, then value = 9A000406 is
displayed.
● "-X2:8 :27‑29":
displays the terminal strip inputs -X2:8 and -X2:27 to -X2:29 of board CB08. Every displayed
location represents a terminal. Four locations are displayed. If a value of 0 is displayed,
then the corresponding terminal is not controlled. If a terminal is controlled, at the
corresponding location for terminal-X2:8 an 8 is displayed, for -X2:27 a 7, for -X2:28 an 8
and for terminal -X2:29 a 9.
Example:
If terminals -X2:8, -X2:28 and -X2:29 are controlled, then value = 8089 is displayed.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


74 List Manual 09/2017
Parameterizing
4.4 Special commissioning tools and information

● "-X2:6/7":
display of terminal strip inputs -X2:6 and -X2:7 of board CB08. Every displayed location
represents a terminal. Two locations are displayed. If a value of 0 is displayed, then the
corresponding terminal is not controlled. If a terminal is controlled, at the corresponding
location for terminal -X2:6 a 6 is displayed, for -X2:7 a 7.
Example:
If only terminal -X2:7 is controlled, then value = 07 is displayed.
● "-X2:21‑26":
display of the terminal strip inputs -X2:21 to -X2:26 of board CB08. Every displayed location
represents a terminal. Eight locations are displayed. If a value of 0 is displayed, then the
corresponding terminal is not controlled. If a terminal is controlled, at the corresponding
location for terminal -X2:21 a 1 is displayed, for -X2:22 a 2, for -X2:23 a 3 etc.
Example:
if terminals -X2:21, -X2:23, -X2:25 and -X2:26 are controlled, the value = 10305600 is
displayed.
● "M1‑X81:…" (cabinet unit, system 1)
"M2‑X81:…" (cabinet unit, system 2, if available)

"M7‑X81:…" (cabinet unit, system 7, if available)
Display of the terminal strip inputs -X81:1 to -X81:5, -X81:13 and -X81:14 the signals board
of a cabinet unit with one inverter. Every displayed location represents a terminal. Eight
locations are displayed, whereby the 6th position is always 0. If a value of 0 is displayed,
then the corresponding terminal is not controlled. If a terminal is controlled, at the
corresponding location for terminal-X81:1 a 1 is displayed, for -X81:2 a 2 etc. – and for -
X81:13 a 3 and -X81:14 a 4.
Example:
if terminals -X18:1, -X81:2, -X81:5 and -X81:13 are control, then the value = 12005030 is
displayed.

4.4.3 Inverter replacement – parameter transfer using IMS


If service is required and board CB08 or the complete device must be replaced, then we
recommend that the inverter parameterization is saved using the IMS software.
Some parameters depend on individual device data – or initiate an action in the FI. They should
not be overwritten by transferring a parameters set from one device to another device. If you
are using a new inverter, this is the reason that not all parameters are transferred using IMS.
Further, the parameters must be checked and if necessary manually set. The following
parameters are involved:

Table 4-15 Parameters that are not transferred

Parameter Menu
"A" "P‑DRIVE DATA" or "P‑SYSTEM DATA"
"Para‑source" "P‑INTERFACES"
"Address" "P‑INTERFACES/P‑RS232/485 (X51)"
"Inp." "P‑MONITORING/P‑fault suppression"

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 75
Parameterizing
4.4 Special commissioning tools and information

Parameter Menu
"Alt.Suppr." "P‑MONITORING/P‑fault suppression"
"Auto‑Tuning" "P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑motor data" or
"P‑MACHINE POWER CONV/P‑generator data"
"Parameter set" "P‑EXTRAS"
"Menu" "P‑EXTRAS"
"Date" "P‑EXTRAS"
"Time" "P‑EXTRAS"
"Test STO/PTC" "P‑EXTRAS"
"ON-hrs." "P‑EXTRAS/P‑opr.counter"
"Opr." OPERATION
"Bal. sensor" "P‑ANALOG INPUTS/P‑Analog input 1"
"Bal. sensor" "P‑ANALOG INPUTS/P‑Analog input 2"
"Addr. DSP1" "P‑SERVICE MODULE"
Addr. DSP2 "P‑SERVICE MODULE"

4.4.4 Temperature sensor evaluation


In menu "P‑ANALOG INPUTS", using parameter "AI-function" you can use analog inputs AI1
and AI2 for evaluating a type "KTY84" or "PT100" temperature sensor. If this is appropriately
parameterized, then with actual values "T-AI1" or "T-AI2" in menu "I‑DRIVE DATA", the
calculated temperature is displayed in °C.

KTY84-130:
The input senses temperatures from -40 °C to 200 °C. The characteristic emulation results in
a maximum error of 0.9 °C. When correctly calibrating the input (feeder cable resistance,
tolerances of the input circuit) a maximum error of 0.5 °C is obtained.

PT100:
The input senses temperatures extending from -40 °C up to 220 °C. The characteristic
emulation results in a maximum error of 0.4 °C. When correctly calibrating the input (feeder
cable resistance, tolerances of the input circuit) a maximum error of 1.1 °C is obtained.

Calibration
To achieve the specified accuracy, the actual conditions must be precisely calibrated. To do
this, calibrate using the original board CB08 and original feeder cable in a way so that the
temperature measured with the sensor is also measured with the most precise measuring
equipment permissible, and using parameter "Bal. sensor" in the menu "P‑ANALOG INPUTS"
an appropriate correction is made so that the temperature value displayed is correct.
If not calibrated, then an additional error of up to 3 °C is obtained as a result of the analog input
and an additional error depending on the feeder cable (cross-section, length) to the
temperature sensor.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


76 List Manual 09/2017
Service & Support A
A.1 Siemens Industry Online Support

Technical questions or additional information


If you have any technical questions or you require additional information, please contact the
Technical Support.
Please have the following data ready:
● Type
● Serial number
You can find this data on the rating plate.

Contact person
If you wish to request on-site service or order spare parts, please contact your local office. This
office will contact the responsible service center on your behalf. You can find your contact
person in the relevant contact database:
www.siemens.com/your contact

See also
Technical Support (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/sc/2090)
www.siemens.com/yourcontact (www.siemens.com/yourcontact)

A.2 Contacts in Ruhstorf an der Rott location (Germany)


Siemens AG
Hans-Loher-Straße 32
94099 Ruhstorf

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 77
Service & Support
A.2 Contacts in Ruhstorf an der Rott location (Germany)

Germany

+49 8531 39 554


24-hour hotline:
+49 8531 39 222
0.06 €/min. from land lines of the German Telekom, mobile phone prices may differ).
+49 8531 39 569
Technical support: driveservice.rhf.de@siemens.com
Spare parts: drivespares.rhf.de@siemens.com
Repair: driverepair.rhf.de@siemens.com
Spare parts on the Internet:
Spares on Web (www.siemens.com/sow)

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


78 List Manual 09/2017
Additional information B
B.1 Parameter/actual value data from the IMS software
More precise data on all of the parameters/actual values is provided in the IMS software. To
do this, select button Data output (see the diagram).
You then obtain all of the relevant data for the selected parameters/actual values on the right-
hand side.
For text selection parameters and/or actual values, in the data output, by clicking on the white
fields for the minimum or maximum value you can find the assignment between the text and
the represented numerical value (e.g. for transfer by fieldbus).

Or you make the selection by pressing "Parameter descriptions". You then obtain an overview
with all of the relevant data, i.e. all parameters/actual values if you selected "All" – or only the
currently selected Parameter/actual value if you selected "Actual parameter".

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 79
Additional information
B.2 Freely selectable setpoint units

B.2 Freely selectable setpoint units


The setpoint unit can be freely selected in the Speed default or process control operating
modes. The following units can be selected:

Table B-1 Setpoint unit

Display unit Physical vari‐ Variable in‐ Base unit Conversion index
able dex for AftDecPoint =
0 1 2 3
Hz Frequency 28 Hz 0 -1 -2 -3
rpm Speed 11 1/sec 67 115 116 71
% Ratio 24 % 0 -1 -2 -3
St/h Pieces/unit 183 St/s 72 117 118 73
time
St/min Pieces/unit 183 St/s 67 115 116 71
time
St/s Pieces/unit 183 St/s 0 -1 -2 -3
time
I/h Liters/unit 184 l/s 72 117 118 73
time
I/min Liters/unit 184 l/s 67 115 116 71
time
I/s Liters/unit 184 l/s 0 -1 -2 -3
time
hl/h Hectoliters/ 186 hl/s 72 117 118 73
unit time
hl/min Hectoliters/ 186 hl/s 67 115 116 71
unit time
hl/s Hectoliters/ 186 hl/s 0 -1 -2 -3
unit time
kg/h Mass flow 15 kg/s 72 117 118 73
kg/min Mass flow 15 kg/s 67 115 116 71
kg/s Mass flow 15 kg/s 0 -1 -2 -3
m /h3
Flow rate 14 m /s
3
72 117 118 73
m /min
3
Flow rate 14 m /s
3
67 115 116 71
m3/s Flow rate 14 m3/s 0 -1 -2 -3
m/s Velocity 13 m/s 0 -1 -2 -3
hPa Pressure 6 Pa 2 1 0 -1
kPa Pressure 6 Pa 3 2 1 0
bar Pressure 6 Pa 5 4 3 2
°C Temperature 17 K 100 119 120 121

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


80 List Manual 09/2017
Additional information
B.3 Display format, conversion index and variable index

B.3 Display format, conversion index and variable index

B.3.1 Display format


The display format defines how a value is displayed:

Table B-2 Display format

Number Format Represen‐ Number Format Represen‐ Number Format Represen‐


tation tation tation
0 - 15 k70 ± ####### 30 uk50 #####
1 k20 ± ## 16 k80 ± 31 uk51 #####.#
########
2 k30 ± ### 17 h20 ## 32 uk41 ####.#
3 k40 ± #### 18 h40 #### 33 uk32 ###.##
4 k12 ± #.## 19 h80 ######## 34 uk23 ##.###
5 k21 ± ##.# 20 d20 ##.##.## 35 uk60 ######
6 k31 ± ###.# 21 t20 ##:##:## 36 uk7 #######
7 k22 ± ##.## 22 uk12 #.## 37 uk80 ########
8 k13 ± #.### 23 uk21 ##.# 38 text ......
9 k50 ± ##### 24 uk31 ###.# 39 Selec‐ ......
tionPNR
10 k51 ± #####.# 25 uk22 ##.## 40 Selection‐ ......
Bits
11 k41 ± ####.# 26 uk13 #.### 41 ktext ......
12 k32 ± ###.# 27 uk20 ## 42
13 k23 ± ##.### 28 uk30 ### 43
14 k60 ± ###### 29 uk40 #### 44

B.3.2 Variable index


In the following table you can find the variable indices, which are defined for PROFIBUS, and
which are used for the inverter.

Table B-3 PROFIBUS variable indices

hex Decimal Unit Phys. varia‐ hex Decimal Unit Phys. varia‐
ble ble
00 0 none - 18 24 % Ratio
01 1 m Length 19 25 % Relative hu‐
midity
02 2 m2 Area 1A 26 g/kg abs. humidity
03 3 m 3
Volume 1B 27 % Percent
04 4 s Time 1C 28 Hz Frequency

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 81
Additional information
B.3 Display format, conversion index and variable index

hex Decimal Unit Phys. varia‐ hex Decimal Unit Phys. varia‐
ble ble
05 5 N Force 1D 29 Nm/A Referred tor‐
que
06 6 Pa Pressure 1E 30 h Power (US)
07 7 kg Weight 1F 31 m/s2 Acceleration
08 8 J Energy, work 20 32 m/s3 Jerk
09 9 W Active power 21 33 kHz Frequency
0A 10 VA Apparent
power
0B 11 [s-1] Speed
0C 12 rad Angle 64 100 in Length (US)
0D 13 m/s Velocity
0E 14 m3/s Flow rate 6D 109 lbs Length (US)
0F 15 kg/s Mass flow
10 16 Nm Torque
11 17 K Temperature B4 180 ft/min Speed (US)
12 18 K Temp. differ‐ B5 181 ft/s2 Accelerat.
ence (US)
13 19 J Entropy B6 182 ft/s3 Jerk (US)
14 20 J/kg Enthalpy B7 183 St/s Pieces/unit
time
15 21 V El. Voltage B8 184 l/s Liters/unit
time
16 22 A Electr. cur‐ B9 185 Hz/Nm Frequ./torque
rent
17 23 Ohm El. resistance BA 186 hl/s Hectoliters/
unit time

B.3.3 Conversion index


In the following table you can find the conversion indices, which are defined for fieldbus, and
which are used for the inverter.

Table B-4 Fieldbus conversion indices

##.. Conver‐ Factor Offset ##.. Conver‐ Factor Offset ##.. Conver‐ Factor Offset
sion in‐ sion in‐ sion in‐
dex dex dex
FA -6 0.00000 0 42 66 0.001/6 0 64 100 1 -273.15
1 0
FB -5 0.00001 0 43 67 1/60 0 65 101 5/9 -459.67
FC -4 0.0001 0 44 68 1000*6 0
0
FD -3 0.001 0 45 69 0
FE -2 0.01 0 46 70 60 0 73 115 0.1/60 0

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


82 List Manual 09/2017
Additional information
B.4 Parameter selection for the parameter switch

##.. Conver‐ Factor Offset ##.. Conver‐ Factor Offset ##.. Conver‐ Factor Offset
sion in‐ sion in‐ sion in‐
dex dex dex
FF -1 0.1 0 47 71 0.001/3 0 74 116 0.01/60 0
600
00 0 1 0 48 72 1/3600 0 75 117 0.1/360 0
0
01 1 10 0 49 73 3600 0 76 118 0,01/36 0
00
02 2 100 0 4A 74 3600*1 0 77 119 0.1 -273.15
000
03 3 1000 0 4B 75 3600*1 0 78 120 0.01 -273.15
000000
04 4 10000 0 4C 76 86400 0 79 121 0.001 -273.15
05 5 100000 0 4D 77 PI/ 0
10800
06 6 100000 0 4E 78 PI/ 0
0 64800
4F 79 PI/180 0
50 80 PI/200 0
51 81 0

The variable index and conversion index define how values that are transferred via bus must
be interpreted, for example.
The variable index specifies the physical variable with its basic unit. The conversion index
defines a multiplication factor and an offset, which you must apply to the transferred numerical
value in order to obtain its correct physical variable.
General: Physical value = (numerical value * factor + offset) [unit]

B.4 Parameter selection for the parameter switch


The following parameters can be switched over to an alternative value using a parameter
switch:

Table B-5 Parameters that can be switched over

fmin n SV1 T SV2 V f SV1


Rotation n SV2 T SV3 I-contin
Operating source n SV3 P T-ctr.SVC I-short
Reset source P sp.ctr. Tr T ctr SVC t-short
RctRS485 Tr sp.ctr. I SetpSource PulseFreq
Rct. BUS P SetpSource IAnaSV% Synchron.
Brake P ctrl. I SV1 t-restart
Fan Tr ctrl. I SV2 Parameter set
ContrMode D controller I SV3 T1
n SetpSource AV source I f source T2

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 83
Additional information
B.5 Analog signal accuracy

t-accel. PAnaSV% I f SV1 T3


t-decel. P SV1 V SetpSource T4
Rounding 1 P SV2 VAnaSV% P T-ctr.FOC
Rounding 2 P SV3 V SV1 Tr T-ctr.FOC
Rounding 3 T SetpSource V SV2
Rounding 4 TAnaSV% V SV3
nAnaSV% T SV1 V f source

B.5 Analog signal accuracy


The analog inputs/outputs on the control electronics and/or I/O board are subsequently
described:

B.5.1 Analog inputs


To analog inputs, each with a 10bit A/D converter are available. The inaccuracy of an analog
input of 0 to ±10 V or 0 to ±20 mA signal up to the A/D converted value is typically < 1 % (max.
2.6 %) of the input range. This accuracy refers to using the analog input as setpoint or actual
value, for example.
The inaccuracy of the analog input on the PI. signals (only for cabinet units) is typically < 2 %
(max. 3.5 %).

B.5.2 Analog outputs


Two analog outputs are available: The output signal is unipolar from 0 to 10 V or from
0 to 20 mA. A signal can be selected from a pool of signals for output when appropriately
parameterized. It is possible to adapt to any display scaling with an initial value not equal to
zero and the final value. An mA increase (typ. 4 mA) can be freely parameterized. To output
plus-minus signals, it is possible to raise the center point.
The analog outputs automatically adjust themselves to the connected instrument, depending
on the load resistor. For a load resistor < 300 Ω, a 20 mA output signal is generated – and for
a load resistor > 1000 Ω, a 10 V output signal is generated. The inaccuracy of an analog output
is max. 1 % in this resistance range. The signal accuracy deteriorates for load resistors of
300 to 1000 Ω.
To define the accuracy of an analog output, the accuracy of the selected signal must be added
to the accuracy of the analog output.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


84 List Manual 09/2017
List of abbreviations C
ARM "Acorn Risc Machine": Microprocessor architecture
ATEX "Atmosphère explosible": Synonym for the two EC explosion protection Directives: ATEX Product Directive 94/9/
EC and ATEX Safety Directive 1999/92/EC
ASM Induction machine
BeO beryllium oxide: toxin. Relevant for the disposal
BGR Health and safety at work regulations
BGV Regulations of the German Trade Association
CD "Compact Disc": Optical storage medium for digital storage of music and data.
CB08 Control electronics board
DASM Dual-fed induction machine
DIL "Dual In-Line Package": Type of packaging (Package) for electronic components
DSP Digital signal processor
DVC "Decisive Voltage Class": Classification of the voltage range used to determine protective measures against
electric shock hazards
ESD Electrostatically Sensitive Devices
EMF Electromotive force
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EN "Europäische Norm": European standards are rules that have been ratified by one of the three European stand‐
ardization committees.
Ex Explosion-proof area
FOC Field-oriented control
FRT "Fault Ride Trough":
FI Frequency inverter
GSD "General Station Description", original "device master data": A data format for PROFIBUS and PROFInet devices
IEC "International Electrotechnical Commission": Standards committee for electrical engineering
HVRT "High Voltage Ride Trough":
IGBT "Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor": Type of power semiconductor
IMS "Inverter Management Software": You can also parameterize the inverter with this software using a PC, save
parameter sets, etc. You can download the software at no cost from the manufacturer's website.
LED "Light Emitting Diode", Light Emitting Diode
LHF "Line Harmonics Filter": Reduces the low-frequency line harmonics of 6-pulse rectifier circuits
LSB "Least Significant Bit": Least significant bit of a binary number
LVRT "Low Voltage Ride Trough": A voltage dip is ridden through
MLFB "Maschinenlesbare Fabrikate Bezeichnung": Product Order No.
MSB "Most Significant Bit": Most significant bit of a binary number
MSC Machine-side converter
NAMUR originally "Normenarbeitsgemeinschaft für Meß- und Regeltechnik in der chemischen Industrie": International
user association for automation in the process industry
NC "Normally Closed", NC contact
NO "Normally Opened", NO contact

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 85
List of abbreviations

LSC Line-side converter


NRTL "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory": American testing facilities that provide product safety testing and
certification services to manufacturers
NYY, Cable types
NYCWY
PCB polychlorinated biphenyls: toxins. Relevant for the disposal.
PELV "Protective Extra Low Voltage", protective extra-low voltage (PELV). previously function extra-low voltage with
safe isolation
PMM permanent magnet machine
PERM Permanent-magnet synchronous motors
PCS Process control system
PPO Parameter process data object: integral part of a Profibus profile
PTC "Positive Temperature Coefficient", Positive Temperature Coefficient: PTC thermistor
RS 232, standards for serial interfaces
RS 485,
RS 422
RTU "Remote Terminal Unit": Remote terminal unit
SELV "Safety Extra Low Voltage": Safety extra low voltage
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
STW Control word
Sub‑D Actually "D‑Sub": common type of a connector system for data connections
SVC "Space Vector Control": space vector modulation, a technique to control rotating electrical machinery based on
pulse width modulation.
TCP "Transmission Control Protocol": a network protocol
TÜV "Technischer Überwachungsverein": A body that carries out technical safety checks as prescribed by national
laws or regulations
UL "Underwriters Laboratories": certification organization for product safety in the USA
USB "Universal Serial Bus": Serial bus system
UPS Uninterruptible power supply
VDE Association for Electrical, Electronic & Information Technologies
De-ion‐ Fully de-ionized water
ized water
ZLU Supplementary supply agreements for inverter drives in power plants
ZSW Status word

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


86 List Manual 09/2017
Parameter overview D
An overview of all of the parameters available in the IMS is subsequently provided, sorted
according to the IMS menu structure.

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017 87
SINAMICS G180

Menu Text No. Describtion

15032
I-DRIVE DATA
n-motor 1989 Motor speed in rotations per minute. For a correct display the exact input of the motor parameter
(rated speed, rated frequency) is prerequisite. The load dependent slip is regarded.

Speed 2123 This value is the motor speed converted into the setpoint normalization with speed control.

I-motor 608 Effective value of the motor current.


Accuracy:
±2% of the inverter short-time current.

I-Mot. Erde 3303 Effective value of earth current at generator-side

V-motor 607 Effective value of the motor input voltage in V.

f-motor 1990 Frequency of the inverter output voltage resp. motor input voltage in Hz.

T-motor 1992 The torque delivered at the motor shaft is calculated out of the electrical power, considering the
speed and the motor losses. With positive sign the motor is driven, with a negative one it is
braked.
Accuracy:
±5% of the nominal value (= torque at FI-continuous output) as from >5Hz in the constant field
range with correct setting of the motor data.

T-mot r/l 1707 The torque delivered at the motor shaft is calculated on the basis of the electrical power in
consideration of the speed and the motor losses. With positive sign der motor turns CW, with a
negative one CCW.
Accuracy:
±5% of the nominal value (= torque in case of FI-continuous output) starting from >5Hz in the
constant field range with correctly set motor data.

P-motor 1991 The mechanical power, supplied at the motor shaft is computed out of the electrical power,
considering the motor losses.
Accuracy:
±3% of FI-continuous output as from >5Hz in the constant field range with correct setting of the
motor data.

Q-Motor 3383 This actual value shows the current reactive power of the generator.

cos phi Mot. 3385 This actual value shows the current cosphi value of the generator.

EarthCurr. 1737 The value of the loss current to earth, which is measured by means of a summation current
transformer over the mains phases.
The metering device is available, dependent from the design of the device. For 500V-devices it
is available as a standard feature and for 690V-devices dependent from the design of the
device.
The earth current can be monitored by a parameterizable threshold (see "I-earth max.") and time
(see "Delay I-earth"). If the earth current rises sharply, the drive will be disconnected.

ON-hrs. 2113 Display of the ON-hours meter. The ON-hours meter counts always when the message
parameterized in "P-EXTRAS:P-Opr.counter:ON-bit" is active. The counter can be readjusted to
any starting value by the user.

Opr.-hrs. 2112 Display of the operating-hours meter. The operating hours meter counts always when the
message parameterized in "P-EXTRAS:P-Opr.counter:Opr.-Bit" is active. The counter cannot be
readjusted by the user.

88
SINAMICS G180

T-AI1 2165 If the O/I function of the analog input 1 is set to KTY84 or PT100 (temperature evaluation of a
corresponding temperature sensor), the temperature is indicated by this actual value.

T-AI2 3666 If the O/I function of the analog input 2 is set to KTY84 (temperature evaluation of a
corresponding temperature sensor), the temperature is indicated by this actual value.

13370
I-setp./act.val.

Mn-SV 2102 Actual set-value: the actual set-value is given by the choosen set value source.

Add-SV 2122 You can select the additive setpoint value separately for each mode of control (Add-source) and
preset an amplification factor (Add-Norm) in the range of -100% to +100%. The so-calculated
additive setpoint value is added to the main setpoint value with the correct sign.

SetVal 2105 Preset main setpoint value.

ActV. 1197 The actual value of process control is indicated in the normalization of the controlled value of
process.

Freq.act. 1786 Actual value of the pulse input as a frequency. Active only with mode f < 20kHz resp f > 20 kHz

Tacho act 1787 Actual value of the pulse input as a speed. Active only with mode Tacho 1 track resp Tacho 2
track.

Pulse act 1196 Actual value of the pulse input after preparation, independent from the selected mode in [%]

14625
I-Profibus/Modbus
BUS 2661 Indication of fieldbus system of the identified BUS hardware.
In case of unknown/faulty no BUS hardware has been identified or the identification has shown
either a system unknown to the software or a fault.

BUS address 1277 The actual value BUS address indicates under which participant's address the FI is responsive
at PROFIBUS. Indicates either the parameter BUS address or the switch-position on the
auxiliary board if the parameter is set to zero.

BUS-Status 1717 Indication of the BUS-status. It is, e.g., indicated whether there is no auxiliary board or if the
connection to the BUS-master is online or offline.

BUS-Bd 2514 Indication of the current PROFIBUS baud rate.

CAN-Err. 3096 By this actual value the status of fault identification is indicated in case of operation with the field-
bus system CANopen (optional).

Modbus Parity 2660 Indication of the current parity-setting in case of Modbus.

BUS STW 1 1259 Display of BUS-control word 1 in Hex, which FI receives via PROFIBUS. Bit0 to Bit10 are
implemented according to PROFIBUS-Profile or not used. Bit11 to Bit15 can be used free
parameterizable in FI.
If BUS is selected either as operation source and/or set value source and the BUS-connection is
not o.k., the value is blinking.

89
SINAMICS G180

BUS STW 2 1260 Display of BUS-control word 2 in Hex, which FI receives via PROFIBUS. Bit0 to Bit10 are
implemented according to PROFIBUS-Profile or not used. Bit11 to Bit15 can be used free
parameterizable in FI.
If BUS is selected either as operation source and/or set value source and the BUS-connection is
not o.k., the value is blinking.

BUS-SetVal1 1261 Display of BUS-set value 1 in Hex, which FI receives via PROFIBUS. This value for example,
when selected as set value source is accepted by FI as set value in the PROFIBUS-Profil-
normalization 0x4000 == 100%.
If BUS is selected either as operating source and/or set value source and the BUS-connection is
not o.k., the value is blinking.

BUS-SetVal2 1262 Display of BUS-set value 2 in Hex, which FI receives via PROFIBUS. This value for example,
when selected as set value source is accepted by FI as set value in the PROFIBUS-Profil-
normalization 0x4000 == 100%.
If BUS is selected either as operating source and/or set value source and the BUS-connection is
not o.k., the value is blinking.

BUS-SetVal3 2865 Display of BUS-set value 3 in Hex, which FI receives via PROFIBUS. This value for example,
when selected as set value source is accepted by FI as set value in the PROFIBUS-Profil-
normalization 0x4000 == 100%.
If BUS is selected either as operating source and/or set value source and the BUS-connection is
not o.k., the value is blinking.

BUS-SetVal4 2866 Display of BUS-set value 4 in Hex, which FI receives via PROFIBUS. This value for example,
when selected as set value source is accepted by FI as set value in the PROFIBUS-Profil-
normalization 0x4000 == 100%.
If BUS is selected either as operating source and/or set value source and the BUS-connection is
not o.k., the value is blinking.

BUS-ActVal 1263 Display of BUS-actual value in Hex, which FI receives via PROFIBUS. This value for example,
when selected as actual value source is accepted by FI as set value in the PROFIBUS-Profil-
normalization 0x4000 == 100%.
If BUS is selected either as operating source and/or set value source and the BUS-connection is
not o.k., the value is blinking.

BUS ZSW 1 1278 Display of the 1st status word in Hex. All Bits are free parameterizable.

BUS ZSW 2 1279 Display of the 2nd status word in Hex. All Bits are free parameterizable.

BUS ZSW 3 3461 Display of the 3nd status word in Hex. All Bits are free parameterizable.

BUS ZSW 4 3462 Display of the 4nd status word in Hex. All Bits are free parameterizable.

%-Hz-Act.val 1169 16384 (0x4000) correspond to a motor frequency within der normalization range of the set value
of BUS frequency.

%-CtrlActVal 1170 16384 (0x4000) correspond to an actual value, acc to the act.-value source to the size of the
normalized process controlled value.

Comm. fault 1345 Maximum value actual fault message.

MELD_NAMUR 2457 Drive status/fault word depending on VIK-NAMUR-definition.

Norm.ActVal.1 3695 Display of the standardized value 1 which was calculated from a device-actual value by the
actual value conversion.

90
SINAMICS G180

Norm.ActVal.2 3696 Display of the standardized value 2 which was calculated from a device-actual value by the
actual value conversion.

Norm.ActVal.3 3697 Display of the standardized value 3 which was calculated from a device-actual value by the
actual value conversion.

Norm.ActVal.4 3698 Display of the standardized value 4 which was calculated from a device-actual value by the
actual value conversion.

Norm.ActVal.5 3699 Display of the standardized value 5 which was calculated from a device-actual value by the
actual value conversion.

Norm.ActVal.6 3700 Display of the standardized value 6 which was calculated from a device-actual value by the
actual value conversion.

Norm.ActVal.7 3701 Display of the standardized value 7 which was calculated from a device-actual value by the
actual value conversion.

Norm.ActVal.8 3702 Display of the standardized value 8 which was calculated from a device-actual value by the
actual value conversion.

I-spec. val. drive 13436

SlipCorr 2152 Indication for the correction of the slip with field-oriented control. In case of a too high deviation
from value = 1 the parameterised nominal motor speed should be corrected.

I-idle act 2153 Indication of the corrected no-load current of the motor. Parameter for motor no-load current "I-
idle" should be set to this value.

11924
I-MEMORY

01: 1901 Single event

1800 Event occurred.

System 1895 System, on which the event has occured.

Date 1801 Date of occurrence of the event.

Time 1802 Actual time of the event.

SetV 1898 Set value prior to the event.

|SetV 1899 Set value when the even occured.

I-rot/gen 3136 Effective value of generator current resp. rotor current (DASM) prior to the event.

|I-rot/gen 3137 Effective value of generator current resp. rotor current (DASM) when event occurs.

V-rot/gen 3138 Effective value of the generator output voltage resp. rotor output voltage (DASM) prior to the
event.

|V-rot/gen 3139 Effective value of the generator output voltage resp. rotor output voltage (DASM) when event
occurs.

f-rot/gen 3140 Frequency of the generator output voltage resp. rotor output voltage (DASM) prior to the event.

|f-rot/gen 3141 Frequency of the generator output voltage resp. rotor output voltage (DASM) when event occurs.

M-gen 3142 Torque output at generator shaft prior to the event.

|M-gen 3143 Torque output at generator shaft when event occurs.

91
SINAMICS G180

EarthCurr 1896 Earth current prior to the event.

|EarthCurr 1897 Earth current after the event.

DC-volts 1817 Voltage of intermediate circuit prior to the event.

|DC-volts 1818 Voltage of intermediate circuit when event occurs.

I-limit 1893 Status "current limit reached" prior to the event.

|I-limit 1894 Status "current limit reached" when event occurs.

PulseFreq 1965 Pulse frequency of the output-side IGBT inverter prior to the event.

|PulseFreq 1966 Pulse frequency of the output-side IGBT inverter on occurence of the event.

Op.-source 1967 Set operating source prior to the event.

|Op.-source 1968 Set operating source on occurence of the event.

SetSource 1969 Set operating source prior to the event.

|SetSource 1970 Set operating source on occurence of the event.

Stat. 1971 Inverter status prior to the event.

|Stat. 1972 Inverter status on occurence of the event.

UserActV1 1973 User actual value 1 prior to the event.

|UserActV1 1974 User actual value 1 on occurence of the event.

UserActV2 1975 User actual value 2 prior to the event.

|UserActV2 1976 User actual value 2 on occurence of the event.

UserActV3 1977 User actual value 3 prior to the event.

|UserActV3 1978 User actual value 3 on occurence of the event.

UserActV4 1979 User actual value 4 prior to the event.

|UserActV4 1980 User actual value 4 on occurence of the event.

Control DSP 1825 "DSP control code" prior to the event.

|Control DSP 1826 "DSP control code" when event occurs.

Status DSP 1827 "DSP status" prior to the event.

|Status DSP 1828 "DSP status" when event occurs.

T-CPU 1830 Internal temperature when event occurs.

T-heat max 1831 Temperature at the converter heat sink when the event occurs (in systems: temperature
maximum of all systems).

T-rectif.max 1981 Maximum rectifier temperature of all systems on occurence of the event.

T-cabin. max 1983 Maximum cabinet temperature on occurence of the event.

T-diff. max 1982 Maximum out of the maximum difference temperatures per each heat sink of power
semiconductors, on occurence of the event.

FaultSuppr 2177 This actual value shows the actual setting of function "fault suppression" prior to the event.

|FaultSuppr 2178 This actual value shows the actual setting of function "fault suppression" upon occurrence of the
event.

RlsMode 2182 This actual value indicates the internal operating mode of the motor management before the
event occures.

92
SINAMICS G180

|RlsMode 2183 This actual value indicates the internal operating mode of the motor management on occurrence
of the event.

n-gen. 3134 Generator speed prior to the event.

|n-gen. 3135 Generator speed when event occurs.

ActV. 2188 Actual value of process-actual-value preparation before the event occures.

|ActV. 2189 Actual value of process-actual-value preparation on occurrence of the event.

T-br.resist. 3381 Here, the current utilization of capacity of the brake resistor in % of its admissible continuous
capacity utilization will be stored when the event is occurring.

I-Rot earth 3380 Here, the effective value of the of the earth current in the rotor will be stored when the event is
occurring.

T-Jmax MSC 3995 Maximum Junction-temperature of all IGBTs and diodes in the machine-side power converter
MSC when the event occurs.

02: … 64: 1901

dito dito

15026
I-INVERTER DATA
Clk.freq. 1657 Actual pulse frequency of the output-side IGBT converter. If the heat sink temperature of the
power semiconductor exceeds a calculated threshold, the pulse frequency will be lowered linear,
dependent from the maximum heat sink termperature.

DC-volts 606 Rectified mains voltage in the intermediate circuit (about peak value of mains voltage).

I-limit 1204 Maximum admissible output current, dependent from


- the heat sink temperatures: maximum ("T-heatsnk max")
- the max. difference ("T-diff. max"),
- the overload capacity of the power sector,
- the continuous current, the short-time current and the time limit (see P-Inverter data: "I
contin.", "I short", "t short")

Derating MSC 2909 Display of active current carrying capacity of the machine-side converter MSC as a percentage
of the nominal value. Depending on, for instance, changes of the reduncency or unfavourable
cooling conditions a reduction (value < 100%) may be required.

t-BrakeChop. 3314 This actual value indicates the time the brake chopper can remain switched-on permanently
without overloading the brake resistor.

T-br.resist. 3387 This actual value shows the current utilization of the brake resistor in % of its admissible
continuous capacity utilization.

Act.FI comp. 4020 This actual value indicates the number of inverters being momentarily active in the system .

PWM sync. 3315 This actual value indicates the current angle of PWM-synchronisation which the inverter is
putting into effect

Iq-ref 2526 Only with motor type = "async_ FOC" or "synch".


This actual value indicates the setpoint value for the torque-generating current.

93
SINAMICS G180

T-ref 8201 This actual value is indicating the setpoint for the torque-generating current. Only with motor
type = "async_FOC" or "sync".

Para-source 1035 Shows the actually set parameterising competence. Setting is made via parameter "P-
INTERFACE:Para-source".

Op.-source 1036 Indicates the actually set operating competence. Setting is made by parameter "P-
INTERFACE:Op.-source".

Set source 1716 Here, the actual setpoint source is indicated. It can be set by parameters P-SPEED DEFAULT:n
SetpSource; P-PROCESS CONTROL:P SetpSource, resp. P-M-CONTROL:T SetpSource. The
setpoint source defines which signal is used for the setpoint value (e.g. Internal, AE1, BUS 1
etc.).

Status 1655 Display of the actual operating status of the inverter.

>Commnd 1656 Display of the next ON-command the inverter is expecting. This value is particularly helpful on
commissioning.

RlsMode 2181 The actual value "RlsMode" (mode of release) indicates the internal operating mode of the motor
management.

Par-Set 2106 Display of the actually selected parameter set.

MSC1 activ 3598 Present condition of the system:


yes - System active
no - ignition pulses of the systems deactivated
deact. - System completely deactivated.

MSC2 activ 3599 Present condition of the system:


yes - System active
no - ignition pulses of the systems deactivated
deact. - System completely deactivated.

MSC3 activ 3600 Present condition of the system:


yes - System active
no - ignition pulses of the systems deactivated
deact. - System completely deactivated.

MSC4 activ 3601 Present condition of the system:


yes - System active
no - ignition pulses of the systems deactivated
deact. - System completely deactivated.

MSC5 activ 3602 Present condition of the system:


yes - System active
no - ignition pulses of the systems deactivated
deact. - System completely deactivated.

MSC6 activ 3603 Present condition of the system:


yes - System active
no - ignition pulses of the systems deactivated
deact. - System completely deactivated.

MSC7 activ 3604 Present condition of the system:


yes - System active
no - ignition pulses of the systems deactivated
deact. - System completely deactivated.

94
SINAMICS G180

13371
I-inverter temp.
The number and the function of individual temperature sensors is power
and type dependent. The sensors represented here are only a selection.
You can find the actually available temperature sensors in the IMS
software under ACTUAL VALUES/I-INVERTER DATA/I-inverter temp.

T-CPU 616 Inside temperature of the inverter.

T-heat max 1283 Maximum of the individual heat sink temperatures at the inverter, performed from temperatures
"T-cooler 1 to 5" (if available).
For cabinet mounted devices again the maximum of the different systems is established.

T-diff. max 1739 Maximum difference of the individual heat sink temperatures at converter "T-cooler 1 to 5" (if
available). For systems: the maximum of the different systems is established again.

T-rectif.max 1544 Maximum of the individual rectifier temperatures "T-rectifier" of all systems.

T-cabin. max 1284 Maximum for the individual cabinet temperatures "T-Cabinet" of all systems.

I-Temp. heat sink 1285 0

14993
I-Temp. Sys.1 MSC
T-cooler 1 615 Temperature of inverter heat sink.

T-cooler 2 1216 Temperature 2 of the heat sink at the inverter of the respective system.

T-cooler 3 1217 Temperature 3 of the heat sink at the inverter of the respective system.

T-cooler 4 1218 Temperature 4 of the heat sink at the inverter of the respective system.

T-cooler 5 1219 Temperature 5 of the heat sink at the inverter of the respective system.

T-cabinet 1220 Cabinet temperature of system.

T-rectifier 1545 Heat sink temperature at the rectifier of system.

14994
I-Temp. Sys.2 MSC
14655
… I-Temp. Sys.7 MSC
dito dito

12520
I-analog input
AI 1 1497 Value of the analog input 1 in % after the preparation. The normalization of the analog value is
adjustable in menu "P-ANALOG INPUTS:P-Analog input 1". Depending on the normalization,
the value corresponds with a voltage of 0..10V and/or a current value of 0..20mA.

AI 2 1498 Value of the analog input 2 in % after the preparation. The normalization of the analog value is
adjustable in menu "P-ANALOG INPUTS:P-Analog input 2". Depending on the normalization,
the value corresponds with a voltage of 0..10V and/or a current value of 0..20mA.

AI Sys1 1499 Value of the analog input 1 in % after the preparation. The normalization of the analog value is
adjustable in menu "P-ANALOG INPUTS:P-Analog inp. Syst.1". Depending on the
normalization, the value corresponds with a voltage of 0..10V and/or a current value of
0..20mA.

AI Sys2 1500 Value of the analog input 2 in % after the preparation. The normalization of the analog value is
adjustable in menu "P-ANALOG INPUTS:P-Analog inp. Syst.2". Depending on the
normalization, the value corresponds with a voltage of 0..10V and/or a current value of
0..20mA.

95
SINAMICS G180

AI Sys3 1501 Value of the analog input 3 in % after the preparation. The normalization of the analog value is
adjustable in menu "P-ANALOG INPUTS:P-Analog inp. Syst.3". Depending on the
normalization, the value corresponds with a voltage of 0..10V and/or a current value of
0..20mA.

AI Sys4 1502 Value of the analog input 4 in % after the preparation. The normalization of the analog value is
adjustable in menu "P-ANALOG INPUTS:P-Analog inp. Syst.4". Depending on the
normalization, the value corresponds with a voltage of 0..10V and/or a current value of
0..20mA.

AI MSC 5 3207 Value of the analog input from machine power converter system MSC 5 in % after the
preparation. The normalization of the analog value is adjustable in menu "P-ANALOG INPUTS:P-
Analog inp. MSC 1". Depending on the normalization, the value corresponds with a voltage of
0..10V and/or a current value of 0..20mA.

AI MSC 6 3208 Value of the analog input from machine power converter system MSC 6 in % after the
preparation. The normalization of the analog value is adjustable in menu "P-ANALOG INPUTS:P-
Analog inp. MSC 6". Depending on the normalization, the value corresponds with a voltage of
0..10V and/or a current value of 0..20mA.

AI MSC 7 3209 Value of the analog input from machine power converter system MSC 7 in % after the
preparation. The normalization of the analog value is adjustable in menu "P-ANALOG INPUTS:P-
Analog inp. MSC 7". Depending on the normalization, the value corresponds with a voltage of
0..10V and/or a current value of 0..20mA.

13558
I-Terminal inputs
X2:9-16 2191 By this actual value is indicated, which ones of the terminal inputs X2:9 to X2:16 of the control
electronics-PCB are engaged. Here is indicated "9" for terminal input X2:9, "A" for X2:10, "1" for
X2:11 and so on. If any input is not engaged, "0" is shown on its place.
If, for example, inputs X2:9, :10, :11, :12, and :15 are engaged, this is displayed by =9A120050.

X2:8 :27-29 2192 By this actual value is indicated, which ones of the terminal inputs X2:8 and X2:27 to X2:29 of
the control electronics-PCB are engaged. Here is indicated "8" for terminal input X2:8, "7" for
X2:27, "8" for X2:8 and so on. If any input is not engaged, "0" is shown on its place.
If, for example, inputs X2:8, X2:27 and X2:29 are engaged, this is displayed by =8709.

M1-X81:1-8 3112 By this actual value is indicated which ones of the terminal inputs X81:1 to :8 of the signals-PCB
of the FI-machine-system 1 are engaged. Here is indicated "1" for the terminal input X81:1, "2"
for X81:2 and so on. If any input is not engaged, "0" is displayed in its place.
If,for example, the inputs X81:1, :3, :4, :5 are engaged, this is displayed by =10345000.

M1-X81:9-16 3117 By this actual value is indicated which ones of the terminal inputs X81:1 to :8 of the signals-PCB
of the FI-machine-system 1 are engaged. Here is indicated "9" for the terminal input X81:9, "A"
for X81:10, "1" for X81:11 and so on. If any input is not engaged, "0" is displayed in its place.
If,for example, the inputs X81:10, :13, :15 are engaged, this is displayed by =0A003050.

M2 … M7 dito

X2:19-26 2193 By this actual value is indicated which ones of the binary inputs X2:19 to X2:26 of the peripherals-
PCB are engaged. Here is indicated "9" for terminal input X2:19, "A" for X2:20 , "1" for X2:21 and
so on. If any input is not engaged, "0" is shown in its place.
If, for example, the inputs X2:19, :20, :22, :25 and :26 are engaged, this is displayed by
=9A020056.

13372
I-spec. val. inv.
Date 605 Actual date.

96
SINAMICS G180

Time 600 Actual time.

Osci 3715 The actual value "Osci" indicates the actual trigger condition of the inverter-internal Osci.

T1 1771 Text actual values can be parameterized. The texts are available from a selection of
standardized text moduls and from the free programmable individual texts (parameterizing only
via IMS). Additionally, an alternative value, that is another text can be assigned operatively to the
selected text actual value via parameter switch.

T2 1772 Text actual values can be parameterized. The texts are available from a selection of
standardized text moduls and from the free programmable individual texts (parameterizing only
via IMS). Additionally, an alternative value, that is another text can be assigned operatively to the
selected text actual value via parameter switch.

T3 1773 Text actual values can be parameterized. The texts are available from a selection of
standardized text moduls and from the free programmable individual texts (parameterizing only
via IMS). Additionally, an alternative value, that is another text can be assigned operatively to the
selected text actual value via parameter switch.

T4 1774 Text actual values can be parameterized. The texts are available from a selection of
standardized text moduls and from the free programmable individual texts (parameterizing only
via IMS). Additionally, an alternative value, that is another text can be assigned operatively to the
selected text actual value via parameter switch.

User act.1 1047 Actual user value 1: programmable actual value indication for service purposes (selection in
menu "P-SERVICE MODULE:Channel 1"!)

User act.2 1048 Actual user value 2: programmable actual value indication for service purposes (selection in
menu "P-SERVICE MODULE:Channel 2"!)

User act.3 1049 Actual user value 3: programmable actual value indication for service purposes (selection in
menu "P-SERVICE MODULE:Channel 3"!)

User act.4 1050 Actual user value 4: programmable actual value indication for service purposes (selection in
menu "P-SERVICE MODULE:Channel 4"!)

User act.5 2595 Actual user value 5: programmable actual value indication for service purposes (selection in
menu "P-SERVICE MODULE:Channel 5"!)

User act.6 2596 Actual user value 6: programmable actual value indication for service purposes (selection in
menu "P-SERVICE MODULE:Channel 6"!)

User act.7 2597 Actual user value 7: programmable actual value indication for service purposes (selection in
menu "P-SERVICE MODULE:Channel 7"!)

User act.8 2598 Actual user value 8: programmable actual value indication for service purposes (selection in
menu "P-SERVICE MODULE:Channel 8"!)

13373
I-device data
Comm. fault 1029 Closed-circuit or full load principle for the fault alarm relay (corr. to switch position of dip switch
"S1.2" on the control - PCB!).

FaultSuppr. 2175 This actual value shows the actual setting of function "fault suppression".

Type 619 Type of inverter is automatically identified by the inverter electronics, depending on the
connected power section.

No.of syst. 1708 Number of subsystems by which the inverter is composed. Value 0 means, that it is a built-in
device, 1 describes a cabinet-mounted device consisting of one system, etc. The control
electronics devices the number of systems automatically from the connected power section unit.

97
SINAMICS G180

No.of syst. LSC 2763 Number of subsystems by which the inverter is composed. Value 0 means, that it is a built-in
device, 1 describes a cabinet-mounted device consisting of one system, etc. The control
electronics devices the number of systems automatically from the connected power section unit.

IC-cap.MSC 4057 Installed capacity of intermediate circuit in the motor-current converter

IC-cap.LSC 4058 Installed capacity of intermediate circuit in the mains-current converter

V-ICmx ct.inh 4059 Maximum admissible voltage of intermediate circuit in case of controller inhibit

Inv.no. 602 Inverter number, given by the manufacturer (upon final test/ex-factory delivery).

Version 618 Software version: Status of revision or modification of the internal inverter software.

C 2523 This actual value indicates the text entered into parameter P-EXTRAS\comment.

11836
P-DRIVE DATA
fmin 002 Internal raising of a frequency set value with speed default and "rotating field = CW / CCW".
With "rotary field = both", "fmin" acts as Skip frequency band from -fmin to +fmin.
With other types of controlling, "fmin" partially has a raising effect.

fmax 001 The output frequency of the inverter can on no account exceed the here indicated frequency limit
"fmax".

Rotation 003 The admissible rotating field direction of the inverter output frequency takes the here indicated
direction.
CW : only clockwise rotating field (independent from the set value polarity).
CCW : only counterclockwise rotating field (independent from the set value pol.).
Both : CW or CCW rotating field, depending on the set value polarity

fno1 1162 Skip frequency band 1 is active only at "ContrMode=Speed". A set value default within the Skip
frequency band is clamped FU-internally to the relevant limit of the range.

1163 Skip frequency band 1 is active only at "ContrMode=Speed". A set value default within the Skip
frequency band is clamped FU-internally to the relevant limit of the range.

fno2 1164 Skip frequency band 2 is active only at "ContrMode=Speed". A set value default within the Skip
frequency band is clamped FU-internally to the relevant limit of the range.

1165 Skip frequency band 2 is active only at "ContrMode=Speed". A set value default within the Skip
frequency band is clamped FU-internally to the relevant limit of the range.

f-start 141 To avoid a "too slow rotation" of the drive in case of a very low set speed value (especially with
analog rated value setting) use this feature to set a minimum frequency value which is accepted
as set value during continuous operation. Hereby, acceleration out of standstill is not influenced.

FieldWeak. 8199 VMAX: Optimization of the controller for maximum output voltage and reduced dynamic. Current
controllers are not active in the weak field range.

FOC: Optimization of the controller to maximum dynamic. Current controllers are active also in
the weak field range. Restrictions, however, must be tolerated regarding the maximum attainable
motor voltage. See parameter "min VReserve".

98
SINAMICS G180

Min VReserve 8200 If parameter "FieldWeak.“ is set to FOC, this parameter will define the voltage reserve, i.e. how
much the peak value of the max. motor voltage fundamental lies below the actual dc-link
voltage. Here, 3% is stipulated as minimum. Typically, 3,5% to 4% should be chosen. The more
dynamic the controller is set, the higher the reserve has to be.

SetVSmoothg. 1071 The set value is inverter-internal smoothed with the here-indicated smoothing time constant.

A 1009 Application: customized basic parameterizations for frequently used applications.

15684
P-Coolg.water heater
ON-Cond. 3374 Parameter for the selection of an additional condition upon which the heater for the cooling water
shall be switched on

15034
P-INTERFACE
Op.-source 228 By this parameter is defined from where the FI will accept the operating (commands ON/OFF
commands etc.).

Reset source 1208 This parameter determines from where the FI will accept a fault acknowledgement.

Para-source 179 By means of this parameter the parameterising source is set.

IMS-timeout 2394 Timeout-time for monitoring of IMS-connection when the IMS is registering temporarily as
operating and/or setpoint source at the inverter.

15388
P-RS232/485 (X51)
RS485-Baudr. 208 The RS485 baud rate determines the transmission speed to the RS485interface.

Address 2199 User address of the inverter at the RS485-interface.

RctRS485 1794 By this parameter the reaction of the inverter in case of a failure of the connection at the RS485
interface is determined. The reaction however is performed only if the RS485 interface is
operating source and/or setpoint source and/or actual value source.

RS485-TmOut 193 If for a longer time than the here parameterized one no valid data are arriving at the interface,
the parameterized reaction as per parameter "RctRS485" will be carried out.

15389
P-RS485 (X26)
RctRS485 3289 By this parameter, the reaction of the inverter in case of a connection failure at the RS485-
interface is defined. The reaction however is carried out only when the RS485-interface is either
operating source and/or setpoint source and/or actual value source.

RS485-TmOut 3288 If for a longer time than the here parameterized one no valid data are arriving at the interface,
the parameterized reaction as per parameter "RctRS485" will be carried out.

15158
P-fieldbus
Rkt. BUS 1274 Determination of the FI reaction if the PROFIBUS communication fails or if Bit10 (guidance from
master, AD) in the control word STW1 of the Master to FI is not set. The reaction is implied only
if the "Timeout time" has elapsed and BUS is selected either as "Op.-source"and/or at "Set
source" and/or at "AV-source" and by that is relevant for the guidance of the system.

Time-out t 1275 Determination of the "Timeout time" if the PROFIBUS communication fails or if Bit10 (guide from
master/AD) in the control word STW1 of the Master to FI is not set. After elapse of the "Timeout
time" the parameterized "Reaction" is implied if BUS is selected either at "Op.-source"and/or at
"Set source" and/or at "AV-source" and by that is relevant for the guidance of the system.

99
SINAMICS G180

Contr. AD 2952 Selection, whether the process output data (PZD OUT) are imported by the inverter via field bus.
always: The process output data will always be imported .
STW1 Bit00: Only when this bit is set by the control, the remaining process output data will be
imported. The BUS-timeout-monitoring observes also this bit.
C.AD bit: The selection of the bit which activates the data transfer from the field bus will be set
by parameter C.AD bit (8278).

C.AD bit 8278 Parameter for the selection of the signal bit by means of which the data transfer is activated from
field bus .
This setting will be effective only when before parameter Contr. AD (2952) was set to C.AD bit.

14616
P-Profibus/Modbus
12321
P-Profibus
BUS address 650 The transport address of the converter can be specified with PROFIBUS. This parameter is
relevant only if the optional PROFIBUS switch-off card is being used. Upon setting of "BUS
address = 0" the transport address is determined by the switch-position on the auxiliary card.

Variant 1199 It is selected whether the GSD-file LOHT0842.GSD with the actual PROFIBUS-power rating of T-
05 or LOHT3105.GSD with the PROFIBUS-power rating of T-03 are used for planning.
Depending on the selected PROFIBUS-power rating a varying number of, e.g., process data,
Baud rates is possible and another ID-No. of the FI is fed back to the PROFIBUS.

PZD-OUT 1227 Determination of the number of cyclic process output data from Master to FI, depending from
parameter "Variant".

PZD-IN 1228 Determination of the number of cyclic process input data from FI to Master, depending from
parameter "Variant".

14617
P-Modbus RTU
BUS address 2657 Here, the desired user address of the inverter is set when Modbus RTU is used.

Baudrate 2658 Here, the desired baud rate is set when Modbus RTU is used.

Parity 2659 Here, the desired parity can be set when Modbus RTU is used.

t-Offline 2662 This parameter defines the maximum time, for which the inverter has to be addressed via a
MODBUS RTU-interface. If the interval between the telegrams exceeds this period, the Timeout-
time will be starting. If the inverter does not receive a telegram until Timeout-time has elapsed,
the reaction will follow.

15920
P-Modbus TCP
IP 3466 Here, the desired IP-address is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
In case of setting "0-0-0-0" the standard IP-address of module "192-168-0-???" will be used.
"???" is set by means of the Dip-switch on the module.

3467 Here, the desired IP-address is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
In case of setting "0-0-0-0" the standard IP-address of module "192-168-0-???" will be used.
"???" is set by means of the Dip-switch on the module.

3468 Here, the desired IP-address is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
In case of setting "0-0-0-0" the standard IP-address of module "192-168-0-???" will be used.
"???" is set by means of the Dip-switch on the module.

3469 Here, the desired IP-address is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
In case of setting "0-0-0-0" the standard IP-address of module "192-168-0-???" will be used.
"???" is set by means of the Dip-switch on the module.

100
SINAMICS G180

SN 3470 Here, the Subnet-mask is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
If the IP-address is set to "0-0-0-0", this parameter will not be used, but the standard value "255-
255-255-0" instead.

3471 Here, the Subnet-mask is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
If the IP-address is set to "0-0-0-0", this parameter will not be used, but the standard value "255-
255-255-0" instead.

3472 Here, the Subnet-mask is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
If the IP-address is set to "0-0-0-0", this parameter will not be used, but the standard value "255-
255-255-0" instead.

3473 Here, the Subnet-mask is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
If the IP-address is set to "0-0-0-0", this parameter will not be used, but the standard value "255-
255-255-0" instead.

GW 3474 Here, the used Gateway-address is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
If the IP-address is set to "0-0-0-0", this parameter will not be used, but the standard value "0-0-
0-0" instead.

3475 Here, the used Gateway-address is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
If the IP-address is set to "0-0-0-0", this parameter will not be used, but the standard value "0-0-
0-0" instead.

3476 Here, the used Gateway-address is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
If the IP-address is set to "0-0-0-0", this parameter will not be used, but the standard value "0-0-
0-0" instead.

3477 Here, the used Gateway-address is set in case that Modbus TCP is used.
If the IP-address is set to "0-0-0-0", this parameter will not be used, but the standard value "0-0-
0-0" instead.

t-Offline 3478 This parameter defines the time for the monitoring of the communication at the bus by the
"Modbus TCP"-board. The Modbus-client must address the FI within this time with an applicable
write-function.
Modbus Function Codes für applicable write-functions are: 5: Write Single Coil, 6: Write Single
Register, 15: Write Multiple Coils 16: Write Multiple Registers, 22: Mask Write Register, 23:
Read/Write Multiple Registers.
If the interval between the telegrams is longer than this period, the BUS-Status is going offline
and the timeout time is starting. If the inverter doesn't receive a telegram until elapse of the
timeout time, the reaction will follow.
If value 0,0 s is set, the monitoring of the Modbus TCP telegrams is switched off. The
Online/Offline identification observes the status of the IP-Link only.

12326
P-PZD OUT-Data
STW 1 1254 Determination at which position of the process output data (Master to FI) the control word STW1
is transmitted. Prerequisit for the transmission is that the selected number of process output data
"PZD-OUT" are in the respective position.

BUS-SetVal1 1256 Determination at which position of the process output data (Master to FI) the BUS-set value 1 is
transmitted. Prerequisit for the transmission is that the selected number of process output data
"PZD-OUT" are in the respective position.

STW 2 1255 Determination at which position of the process output data (Master to FI) the control word STW2
is transmitted. Prerequisit for the transmission is that the selected number of process output data
"PZD-OUT" are in the respective position.

BUS-SetVal2 1257 Determination at which position of the process output data (Master to FI) the BUS-set value 2 is
transmitted. Prerequisit for the transmission is that the selected number of process output data
"PZD-OUT" are in the respective position.

101
SINAMICS G180

BUS-ActVal 1258 Determination at which position of the process output data (Master to FI) the BUS-actual value is
transmitted. Prerequisit for the transmission is that the selected number of process output data
"PZD-OUT" are in the respective position.

BUS-SetVal3 2863 Determination at which position of the process output data (Master to FI) the BUS-set value 3 is
transmitted. Prerequisit for the transmission is that the selected number of process output data
"PZD-OUT" are in the respective position.

BUS-SetVal4 2864 Determination at which position of the process output data (Master to FI) the BUS-set value 4 is
transmitted. Prerequisit for the transmission is that the selected number of process output data
"PZD-OUT" are in the respective position.

12327
P-PZD IN-Data
PZD 1 1264 Determination which FI-act. value is transmitted at position PZD1 of the process input data (FU
to Master).

PZD 2 - PZD 30 dito


15111
P-CANopen
Node-ID 2998 Adjustment of node identifier of the inverter in the CANopen network.

Baudrate 2999 Adjustment of baud rate for the CANopen interfacing.

ID HB-cons. 3000 Node-ID of the active CANopen node whose heartbeat-signal is to be supervised. Normally it is
a control unit (PLC) that controls the inverter and presets the setpoint value.

t HB-cons. 3001 Within this time interval a heartbeat-signal shall be received by the active CANopen that is to be
supervised. If no heartbeat-signal is received the normal timeout-time will start and after its
elapse the parameterized reaction is carried out.
By the setting value 0 ms this supervision will be switched off.

t HB-prod. 3002 By this parameter that time interval is defined within which the inverter is sending a heartbeat-
signal to the CANopen interface.

Guard Time 3668 With this parameter the Guard Time is set for the function Node-Guarding. With value 0 the
function Node-Guarding is deactivated.

Life Time Fact. 3669 With this parameter the Life Time Factor is set for the function Node-Guarding. With value 0 the
function Node-Guarding is deactivated.

15113
P-RPDO1
Enable 3012 This parameter is a part of the COB-ID of the respective PDO. It defines whether the PDO is
inactive (= no) or if it is active and which CAN-identifier is used (= 11-Bit or = 29-Bit).

CAN-ID 3013 This parameter is part of the COB-ID of the respective PDO. It defines the CAN-ID of the PDO.
Depending on the "Enable" an 11-bit or 29-bit identifier can be set.

t-event 3014 This parameter defines the cycle time for which the receipt of the respective RPDO is
supervised. If the RPDO is not received within the cycle time the normal timeout-time will start
and after its elapse the parameterized reaction is carried out.
By the setting value 0 ms this supervision will be switched off.

No. of values 3101 By this parameter the number of values is defined which are transmitted via the respective PDO.

value1 3015 By this parameter the meaning of the 1st 16-bit value in the respective RPDO is defined, for
instance control word BUS STW 1 or setpoint value BUS-SetVal1, etc.

102
SINAMICS G180

value2 3016 By this parameter the meaning of the 2st 16-bit value in the respective RPDO is defined, for
instance control word BUS STW 1 or setpoint value BUS-SetVal1, etc.

value3 3017 By this parameter the meaning of the 3st 16-bit value in the respective RPDO is defined, for
instance control word BUS STW 1 or setpoint value BUS-SetVal1, etc.

value4 3018 By this parameter the meaning of the 4st 16-bit value in the respective RPDO is defined, for
instance control word BUS STW 1 or setpoint value BUS-SetVal1, etc.

15114
P-RPDO2
Enable 3019 This parameter is a part of the COB-ID of the respective PDO. It defines whether the PDO is
inactive (= no) or if it is active and which CAN-identifier is used (= 11-Bit or = 29-Bit).

CAN-ID 3020 This parameter is part of the COB-ID of the respective PDO. It defines the CAN-ID of the PDO.
Depending on the "Enable" an 11-bit or 29-bit identifier can be set.

t-event 3021 This parameter defines the cycle time for which the receipt of the respective RPDO is
supervised. If the RPDO is not received within the cycle time the normal timeout-time will start
and after its elapse the parameterized reaction is carried out.
By the setting value 0 ms this supervision will be switched off.

No. of values 3102 By this parameter the number of values is defined which are transmitted via the respective PDO.

value1 3022 By this parameter the meaning of the 1st 16-bit value in the respective RPDO is defined, for
instance control word BUS STW 1 or setpoint value BUS-SetVal1, etc.

value2 3023 By this parameter the meaning of the 2st 16-bit value in the respective RPDO is defined, for
instance control word BUS STW 1 or setpoint value BUS-SetVal1, etc.

value3 3024 By this parameter the meaning of the 3st 16-bit value in the respective RPDO is defined, for
instance control word BUS STW 1 or setpoint value BUS-SetVal1, etc.

value4 3025 By this parameter the meaning of the 4st 16-bit value in the respective RPDO is defined, for
instance control word BUS STW 1 or setpoint value BUS-SetVal1, etc.

15115
P-TPDO1
Enable 3026 This parameter is part of the COB-ID of the respective PDO. It defines whether the PDO is
inactive (= no) or if it is active and which CAN-identifier is used (= 11-Bit or = 29-Bit).

CAN-ID 3027 This parameter is part of the COB-ID of the respective PDO. It defines the CAN-ID of the PDO.
Depending on the "Enable" an 11-bit or 29-bit identifier can be set.

Type 3028 This parameter defines the transmission type of the TPDO.
sync: With the definition "sync" and by setting the parameter "No. of SYNC" to = 0 the
transmission type is set to "synchronous acyclic". If parameter "No. of SYNC" has a value of 1-
240 the transmission type is set to "synchronous cyclic". Here, the transmission of the TPDO is
performed after the receipt of this respective number of SYNC- telegrams.
event spec: With setting "event spec." the transmission of the TPDO will be performed after the
occurence of an internal event. By parameter "t-inhibit" a minimum transmission interval time is
set, elapse of which is awaited before the internal event can again release the transmission of
the respective TPDO.

No. of SYNC 3029 This parameter is relevant only if the transmission type parameter "type" is set to ="sync".
0: By setting to 0 the transmission type is set to "synchronous acyclic".
1-240: By setting to 1-240 the transmission type will be set to "synchronous cyclic". Here, the
transmission of the TPDO is performed after receipt of this respective number of SYNC-
telegrams.

103
SINAMICS G180

t-inhibit 3030 By this parameter the minimum transmission interval time for the respective TPDO is defined
with transmission type "type = event-spec.". The elapse of this time will be awaited before the
internal event can again release the transmission of the respective TPDO.

t-event 3031 By this parameter the maximum transmission interval time for the respective TPDO is defined
with transmission type "type = event-spec.". After elapse of this time the respective TPDO will be
transmitted, even when the internal event for the transmission has not yet occured.
The value = 0 deactivates this function.

No. of values 3103 By this parameter the number of values is defined which are transmitted via the respective PDO.

value1 3032 By this parameter that actual value is defined, which is transmitted in the respective TPDO in the
1st 16-bit value. For instance status word ZSW 1 or an actual current, etc.

value2 3033 By this parameter that actual value is defined, which is transmitted in the respective TPDO in the
2st 16-bit value. For instance status word ZSW 1 or an actual current, etc.

value3 3034 By this parameter that actual value is defined, which is transmitted in the respective TPDO in the
3st 16-bit value. For instance status word ZSW 1 or an actual current, etc.

value4 3035 By this parameter that actual value is defined, which is transmitted in the respective TPDO in the
4st 16-bit value. For instance status word ZSW 1 or an actual current, etc.

P-TPDO2…7
dito dito

12324
P-ZSW1 free bit
Bit0 2939 Selection of binary information indicated on the free Bit 0 of status word ZSW1 . Selection is
performed out of a pool of binary information available in the FI .

Bit1 ... Bit 15 dito

12325
P-ZSW2 free bit
Bit0 1238 Selection of binary information indicated on the free Bit 0 of status word ZSW2 . Selection is
performed out of a pool of binary information available in the FI .

Bit1 ... Bit 15 dito

15834
P-ZSW3 free bit
Bit0 3754 Selection of binary information indicated on the free Bit 0 of status word ZSW3. Selection is
performed out of a pool of binary information available in the FI .

Bit1 ... Bit 15 dito

15835
P-ZSW4 free bit
Bit0 3770 Selection of binary information indicated on the free Bit 0 of status word ZSW4. Selection is
performed out of a pool of binary information available in the FI .

Bit1 ... Bit 15 dito

16246
P-actual value conv.
16247
P-Actual value 1
Value 3679 Choice of the device-actual value which is converted into the standardized actual value 1.

100% 3687 Standardisation value for the conversion of the selected device-actual value into the
standardized actual value 1.

Smoothing 8259 Filter time constant of the selected actual value of the device, for the normalized actual value 2.

104
SINAMICS G180

16248
P-Actual value 2
16254
… P-Actual value 8
dito dito

15007
P-INVERTER DATA
V mains nom. 140 By means of parameter "V mains nom." the rated voltage of the inverter is set. Basically, the
rated mains voltage is independent from the set motor voltage; this however remains restricted
to values within the range of the mains voltage (possibly passing into the range of field
weakening).

DC min. 1718 Undervoltage threshold in the intermediate circuit. If the intermediate circuit voltage falls below
this value, fault message "undervoltage" is put out.

Brake 1221 Here it is to be set whether braking device is available and its kind:
"off": no braking device available.
"on": this inverter is an individual unit (no DC-combination) and it is equipped with a braking
device (chopper transistor and resitor).
"R-supply": this inverter is not equipped with its own braking device, however it works in DC-
combination with another device that is equipped with a braking device (chopper or energy
recovery feature).

P-BrakeRes. 1037 Continuous rating of a connected brake resistor. The inverter prevents overloading if power and
resistance value have been set correctly (s.a. parameter for the resistance value and fault
message for brake resistor).
For that, the quickly established actual value of real power is smoothed by the time constant set
in parameter "tau-Br.res." .

R-BrakeRes. 1038 Resistor value of a connected brake resistor.

tau-Br.res. 3991 Parameter for the setting of the thermal time constant tau of the brake resistor.

UD-MAXFACT 1719 Percentage of the admissible overvoltage in the intermediate circuit (triggering point of the
voltage limitation controller).
100 % corresponds with the peak value of the parameterized rated voltage of the inverter.

Fan 3716 By this parameter is defined, at which time the fans of the device are switched on.
T-contrl. = The fans are switched-on temperature-controlled.
slow = At least, the fans will be running always with slow or with temperature-dependent high
speed.
fast = The fans will be running always with high speed.

t-PU-fan.min 8279 Minimum running time of the power unit fan in stage "fast".
If one of those conditions is fulfilled which cause the power unit fan to switch over to "fast" , it will
remain in this stage at least for the here set time, except one of the heat sinks falls below the
minimum temperature set in parameter T-HS min fan (8280).
Attention: This parameter is effective only with water-cooled inverters!

T-HS min fan 8280 Minimum temperature of the heat-sinks for the observation of the minimum running time of the
power unit fans. If the temperature in one of the heat sinks falls below the here set value, the
minimum running time of the fan set in parameter t-PU-fan.min (8279) will become ineffective.
Attention: This parameter is effective only in case of water-cooled inverters!

15018
P-MONITORING
Setp/actv.dev 142 Here, the quantity of deviation from the set speed value to the actual value can be set, showing
the signal "Diff set/act".

105
SINAMICS G180

I-earth max. 1542 For devices intended for earth-free supply systems a differential-current converter is provided in
the mains input .
If at such a device an earth-fault occurs at the converter output side, a fault-current is generated,
that, among other factors, depends on the size of the load capacity of the mains (see actual
value "EarthCurr.").
By this parameter the user can set a comparison threshold for this fault current. If the set value is
exceeded the respective bit is set.
A fault message is given only if the bit is parameterized for fault tripping.
Note: For the internal protection of the device the earth-current actual value is monitored for
another, not parameterizable threshold.

Delay I-earth 1543 Delay time for the parameterizable earth-current monitoring function (see parameter "I-earth
max.").

Sym. phases 12971 Monitoring threshold for the asymetry-monitoring of the motor current. The indication refers to
the actual motor current. The higher value from this parameter and from the "I-sym. ph." is used
as the actual threshold.

I-sym. ph. 12972 Monitoring threshold for the asymetry-monitoring of the motor current. The higher value from
this parameter and from the "Sym. Phases" is used as the actual threshold.

I-earth MSC 3273 By this parameter the monitoring threshold of MSC-side earth current monitoring (fault of
differential current of motor) is set.

t-earth MSC 3274 By this parameter the time-delay of MSC-side earth current monitoring (fault of differential
current of motor) is set.

13442
P-fault suppression
Std.Suppr. 2154 Here, you can define the standard setting of function "fault suppression". You can select whether
or not the inverter shall be suppressing certain shut-down actions, only indicating the respective
events and generating the common warning .
Setting inactive: Any fault results in a shut-down with common fault indication.
Setting low: Monitoring that shows unplausible values (possible defect of the monitoring link)
does not result in a shut-down.

Input 2155 Here you will set the binary information by which function "fault suppression" is switched over
from "Std.Suppr." to "Alt.Suppr.".

Alt.Suppr. 2156 Here you can define the optional setting of function "fault suppression". You can select whether
or not the inverter shall be suppressing certain shut-down actions, only indicating the respective
events and generating the common warning. The optional value is used if switching-over is
effected by the binary signal that has been selected with parameter "Inp.".
Setting "inactiv": Any fault is causing a shut-down with common fault indication.
Setting "low": Monitoring showing unplausible values (possible defect of the monitoring link)
does not result in a shut-down.
Setting "mean": Those monitoring features are deactivated additionally, by which no immediate
destruction of the device is to be expected (e.g. temperature monitoring).
Setting "high": Also monitoring actions are deactivated by which an immediate destruction of the
device is to be extected.

15730
P-Air circulation
AirCirc.Cab. 3392 Parameter to select whether there is forced air circulation provided in the cabinet.

ON-Cond. 3393 Parameter to select an additional condition, upon which the forced air circulation shall be
engaged.
T-OnCtrCabFan 3394 Parameter for setting that cabinet temperature, upon overranging of which the forced air
circulation is engaged in the "slow" step.

15543
P-Cabinet heating

106
SINAMICS G180

T-CabHeaterON 3370 Parameter to set the cabinet temperature below which the cabinet heater will be switched on.

ON-Cond. 3371 Parameter for the selection of an additional condition upon which the cabinet heater shall be
switched on.

14794
P-MACHINE POWER CONV

ContrMode 1097 Selection of the desired operation control mode. Selection is possible between speed default,
process control, torque control and current control.
Speed default: The FI follows to a speed proportional set value.
Process control: With the internal PID-controller one process value can be controlled (e.g.
pressure, flow). Feedback of the actual value of process is required. Moreover, you may
determine whether speed, torque or output current shall provide the regulating quantity for the
process control.
Examples:
Setting to process-m for torque regulation with a metering shaft.
Setting to process-I for the regulation of the exciting current of a generator if the generator output
voltage is given as the actual value.
Torque control: As set value of the device the torque is preset. The internally calculated motor
torque is used as the actual value for the torque control. The sign of the actual value defines the
working direction of the torque.
Current control: As set value of the device the current is preset. The motor current measured by
the FI is used as the actual value for the current control.
Except with Menu=Expert, only the required menu for the selected mode of control is visible.
Be careful when using the inverter as the current controller:
Only ohmis/inductive loads are admissible (cos phi <= 0,95). Pure ohmic load may cause
misbehaviour of the current controller!

11909
P-SPEED DEFAULT
n SetpSource 1096 By this parameter selection is made which setpoint source is applicable for control mode =
speed.

t-accel. 043 In case of an increase of the set value of frequency the output frequency of the inverter does not
rise faster than determined by the acceleration time. The acceleration time indicates the time
period for the set value integrator to change the output frequency from 0 Hz to the actual
maximum frequency. The rounding of the transition from constant frequency to acceleration and
back again is defined by parameters "Rounding 1" and "Rounding 2".

t-decel. 044 With the decrease of the frequency set value the output frequency of the inverter does not fall
faster than determined by the deceleration time. The deceleration time sets the time period
during which the set value integrator changes the output frequency from the actual maximum
frequency to 0 Hz. The rounding of the transition from constant frequency to deceleration and
back again is defined by parameters "Rounding 3" and "Rounding 4".

t-emerg 060 After activation of "emergency stop" the inverter tries to decelerate the drive to zero with the here
set speed. The emergency stop time indicates the time period for the set value integrator to
change the output frequency from the actual maximum frequency to 0 Hz in case of an
emergency stop. The rounding of the transition from the constant frequency to the emergency
stop deceleration is defined by parameters "Round. em.".

Rounding 1 1080 Rounding of the acceleration curve upon start of acceleration.


Enter the frequency (in percentage of fmax) at which the rounding is completed and the
parameterized acceleration ramp (fmax/t-accel.) is reached.
Example: fmax=50,0Hz; upon entering of 10% the set value integrator works in rounding from
begin of acceleration until the frequency has changed by 5,0Hz.

107
SINAMICS G180

Rounding 2 1081 Rounding of the acceleration curve upon reaching the set value.
Enter the frequency (in percentage of fmax) before the set value is reached, at which the
rounding shall start.
Example: fmax=50.0Hz; upon entering of 10% the rounding starts at a distance of 5,0Hz before
reaching the actual set value.

Rounding 3 1082 Rounding of the braking curve upon start of deceleration.


Enter the frequency (in percentage of fmax) at which the rounding is completed and the
parameterized braking ramp (fmax/t-decel.) is reached.
Example: fmax=50,0Hz; upon entering of 10% the set value integrator works in rounding from
begin of deceleration until the frequency has changed by 5,0Hz.

Rounding 4 1083 Rounding of the braking curve upon reaching the set value.
Enter the frequency (in percentage of fmax) at which the rounding shall start prior to reaching the
set value.
Example: fmax=50.0Hz; upon entering of 10% the rounding starts at a distance of 5,0Hz before
reaching the actual set value.

Round. em. 1085 Rounding of the emergency braking curve at the begin of deceleration.
Enter the frequency (in percentage of fmax), at which the rounding shall be completed and the
parameterised emergency stop ramp (fmax/t-emerg) is reached.
Example: fmax=50,0Hz; upon input of 10% the set value integrator operates from the begin of
the deceleration until the frequency changes in rounding by 5,0Hz.

ZeroPassage 1087 It is selected how the set value integrator carrieds out the reversal of the rotating direction.
With "ZeroPassage=rounded" the rounding "Rounding 4" and after that, upon start into the
opposite direction, "Rounding 1" are considered upon deceleration to zero.
With "ZeroPassage=linear" the travel through zero is carried out without rounding.

Unit 1171 For representation of the set value at "ContrMode=Speed" a unit can be selected (e.g. Hz, rpm,
St/min etc.).

AftDecPoint 1172 For representation of the set value at "ContrMode=Speed" the number of displayed digits behind
the decimal point can be determined.

fnom-M 1173 Assignment of rated motor frequency (see P-MOTOR DATA) resp. of synchronous motor speed
to set value normalization (unit and digits behind decimal point).
E.g. setting to 100,0 St/min: to indicate that the rated motor frequency (synchronous speed)
corresponds to a quantity of 100 St/min.

nAnaSV% 1099 If an analog input is selected as the set value source, the normalization of the analog input is
determined by this parameter.
100% (10V/20mA) correspond to the here set value.

Zero pt 007 "0 -> fmin": [-10V,0V]->[Scale,fmin] ; [0V,10V]->[fmin,Scale];


"0 -> Null": [-10V,0V]->[Scale,0Hz]; [0V,10V]->[0Hz,Scale];
"<=0 -> fmin": [-10V,0V]->[0Hz,0Hz]; [0V,10V]->[fmin,Scale];
"<=fmin -> fmin": [-10V,0V]->[0Hz,0Hz]; [0V,10V]->[0Hz,Scale].
This parameter is only effective for analog set value indication and rotary field "left" or "right".

Bus SV% 1161 If BUS is selected as the set value source the normalization of the BUS set value is determined
by this parameter.
100% (0x4000) correspond to the value set here.

108
SINAMICS G180

n SW1 1166 Fixed set value 1 with "ContrMode=Speed". The value is entered into the set value normalization
(unit, digits behind decimal point).

n SV2 1167 Fixed set value 2 with "ContrMode=Speed". The value is entered into the set value normalization
(unit, digits behind decimal point).

n SV3 1168 Fixed set value 3 with "ContrMode=Speed". The value is entered into the set value normalization
(unit, digits behind decimal point).

StartSV 2956 Adjustment of the start-setpoint for the speed default setting. This setpoint is used when the
external setpoint has not yet been released see menu "P-OPERATION:P-MSC-setpoint ON".

n Add-Source 1098 Source for the additve setpoint value in the respective mode of control.

n Add-Norm 2098 The normalization factor for the additive setpoint value in the respective mode of control. The
additive setpoint value is added to the main setpoint value with the correct sign. With negative
sign you will achieve an inversion of the additive setpoint value before addition and therefore
quasi a subtraction.

P sp.ctr. 1000 P-component (amplification) of the speed controller:


for adapting the controller to the different moments of inertia of the lift.
Mind: the higher the m.i. of the load is, the higher the required amplification should be (Attention!
Too high values will cause "unsmooth" running behaviour, too low values show dynamic
rated/actual deviations in case of changes of the rated value).

Tr sp.ctr. 1001 Readjustment time of the speed controller:


Normally this time does not need to be changed. Changes only in exceptional cases, e.g. if with
the amplification ("P sp.ctr.") no good result can be achieved.
Generally: extended time will dampen the speed oscillations, however would make the control
circuit slower.

P sp.ct.pos 1002 P-component (amplification) of the speed controller für position control (synchronous drives)
resp. for starting (asynchronous drives):
the boundary conditions are analogous to those of the "P sp.ctr.", with about the same set
values!

109
SINAMICS G180

Tr sp.ct.pos 1003 Readjustment time of the speed controller für position control (synchronous drives) resp. for
starting (asynchronous drives):
normally this time does not need to be changed. The boundary conditions are analogous to
those of the "Tr sp.ctr.", with about the same set values!

13355
P-Limit for n
Function 2144 Here you can select whether an additional limit shall be inactive or on which variable (e.g.
frequency, torque) this limit shall effect.

LimSource 2145 Selection of source for the value of the additional limit.

AnaLim% 2146 Normalization of the analog value if used as an additional limiting value.

BusLim% 2147 Normalization of the bus value if used as an additional limiting value.

LimSV1 2148 Constant value for the use as an additional limiting value.

t-Lim 2149 The value of the additional limit is slowly changed by an integrator. Here, you can set the
integration time of this integrator. During this action the time is set the integrator needs to adjust
the selected variable from 0 to nominal value.

T-Lim n 8266 By means of this parameter will be defined whether the torque limitation with speed control shall
be effective only in motive operation, only in generative operation or in both cases.

11838
P-PROCESS CONTROL

P SetpSource 1792 By this parameter selection is made which setpoint value is applicable for control mode =
process.

P ctrl. 1754 Adjustment of the proportional part "P-gain" of the integrated process controller.
Adjustment 1,00 means, that with 100% control offset a variable of 100% is generated.

Tr ctrl. 1755 Adjustment of the integral portion "I-gain" of the integrated process controller.
Adjustment 1,0 s means, that with given control offset the "I-gain" generates within this time
period (1,0 sec) an additional variable in the amount of the "P-gain" by integration.

D ctrl. 1756 Adjustment of the differential portion "D-gain" of the integrated process controller.
Adjustment 1,0 s means, that with a changing speed of the control offset of 100% within this time
period (1,0 sec), a variable of 100% is generated by the "D-gain".

AV source 1763 By this parameter selection is made which actual value source is selected as the actual one.

Unit 1757 For the representation of the set value with "ContrMode=process-n/-M/-I" a unit can be selected
(e.g. Hz, rpm, St/min etc.).

AftDecPoint 1758 For the representation of the set value with "ContrMode=process-n/-M/-I" can be selected with
how many digits behind the decimal point the set value shall be displayed.

MaxSet 1759 Defines the numerical value in the selected unit, that can be entered as the maximum for the set
value.
With internal set value no higher value can be entered.
If a higher value is preset by another set value source, this maximum value is the limit.

110
SINAMICS G180

PAnaSV% 1760 Determines the normalization of an analog set value.


It is preset to which set value in the selected unit an analog signal of 10V/20mA shall
correspond. This value can be higher than "MaxSet", whereby an internal limitation to "MaxSet"
is set.

Bus SV% 1761 Determines the normalization of a bus set value.


It is preset, to which set value in the selected unit a bus signal of 0x4000 shall correspond. This
value can be higher than "MaxSet", whereby an internal limitation to "MaxSet" is set.

ActSmoothg 1764 The actual value is inverter-internally smoothed with the here indicated smoothing time-constant.

AnaAct% 1765 Determines the normalization of an analog actual value.


It is preset to which actual value in the selected unit an analog signal of 10V/20mA shall
correspond.

BusAct% 1766 Determines the normalization of the bus actual value.


It is preset to which actual value in the selected unit an bus signal of 0x4000 shall correspond.

P SV1 1768 Fixed set value 1 with "ContrMode=Prozess-n/-M/-I". The value is entered into the set value
normalization (unit, digits behind decimal point).

P SV2 1769 Fixed set value 2 with "ContrMode=Prozess-n/-M/-I". The value is entered into the set value
normalization (unit, digits behind decimal point).

P SV3 1770 Fixed set value 3 with "ContrMode=Prozess-n/-M/-I". The value is entered into the set value
normalization (unit, digits behind decimal point).

StartSV 3714 Setting of starting setpoint for the closed-loop process control. This setpoint is used if the
external setpoint is not enabled (see menu "P-OPERATION:P-MSC-setpoint ON").

P Add-Source 2095 Source for the additive setpoint value in the respective mode of control.

P Add-Norm 2099 The normalization factor for the additive setpoint value in the respective mode of control. The
additive setpoint value is added to the main setpoint value with the correct sign. With negative
sign you will achieve an inversion of the additive setpoint value before addition and therefore
quasi a subtraction.

13613
P-n-precontrol
Action 2225 This parameter is effective only with "control mode = process-n". Thus, you can activate a
frequency precontrol.
Adjusting facilities:
off: No frequency precontrol.
add: The controller output signal is added to the value of the precontrol frequency.
mult: The controller output signal is multiplied with the value of the precontrol frequency.
PrCtr only.: The controller is not active. The value of frequency precontrol is applied.

preCtrSource 2226 By this parameter you are selecting the source for the value of frequency precontrol.

pAnaSV% 2227 By this parameter you are defining the factor for the scaling of an analog value as the value of
frequency precontrol. 10V/20mA conforms with the value set here.

pBusSV% 2228 By this parameter you are defining the factor for the scaling of a bus-value as the value for the
precontrol frequency. Nominal bus-value (0x4000) conforms with the value set here.

p SV1 2229 Here you can set the constant setpoint value of the precontrol.

111
SINAMICS G180

Limitation 2231 If with "control mode = process-n" a frequency precontrol with additive or multiplicative
intervention is activated (intervention = "add" or = "mult") the maximum intervention of the
process controller is defined by this parameter. The input is made in "%". Setting 0,0% causes
that the process controller can not interfere in the frequency precontrol.
Additive intervention: 100% means that the controller output (adding value) can reach +- 100,0%
of fmax at maximum.
Multiplicative intervention: 100,0% means that the controller output (multiplying value) can reach
value 1 (+- 100,0%), i.e. minimum 0 and maximum 2.

11839
P-T-CONTROL
T SetpSource 1793 By this parameter selection is made which setpoint value is applicable for control mode = torque.

MaxSet 1193 Defines the max. setpoint in case of torque-control.


With internal setpoint no higher value can be entered.
If by another setpoint source a higher value is preset, limitation to this value is made.

TAnaSV% 1194 Defines the normalisation of an analog setpoint.


It is preset, to which torque setpoint an analog signal of 10V/20mA shall correspond. This value
can be higher than "MaxSet", in which case an internal limitation to the "MaxSet" is made.

Bus SV% 1195 Defines the normalisation of a bus setpoint.


It is preset, to which torque setpoint a bus signal of 0x4000 shall correspond. This value can be
higher than "MaxSet", in which case an internal limitation to the "MaxSet" is made.

T SV1 1775 Fixed set value 1 in case of torque-control.

T SV2 1776 Fixed set value 2 in case of torque-control.

T SV3 1777 Fixed set value 3 in case of torque-control.

StartSV 2953 Adjustment of the start-setpoint for the torque control. This setpoint is used when the external
setpoint has not yet been released see menu "P-OPERATION:P-MSC-setpoint ON".

T Add-Source 2096 Source for the additive setpoint value in the respective mode of control.

T Add-Norm 2100 The normalization factor for the additive setpoint value in the respective mode of control. The
additive setpoint value is added to the main setpoint value with the correct sign. With negative
sign you will achieve an inversion of the additive setpoint value before addition and therefore
quasi a subtraction.

P T-ctr.SVC 3746 Proportional component of the master controller for torque or power rating with Space-Vector-
control ("Motor type = async_SVC").

Tr T-ctr.SVC 3747 Reset time of the master controller for torque or power rating with Space-Vector- control ("Motor
type = async_SVC").

13363
P-Limit for T
Function 2158 Here you can select whether an additional limit shall be inactive or which varable (e.g. frequency,
torque) this limitation shall be effecting.

LimSource 2159 Selection of the source for the limiting value of the additional limitation.

AnaLim% 2160 Normalization of the analog value if used as an additional limiting value.

BusLim% 2161 Normalization of the BUS value if used as an additional limiting value.

112
SINAMICS G180

LimSV1 2162 Constant for use as an additional limiting value.

t-Lim 2163 The value of the additional limit is slowly changed by an integrator. Here, you can set the
integration time of this integrator. During this action the time is set the integrator needs to adjust
the selected variable from 0 to nominal value.

T-Lim T 8267 By means of this parameter will be defined whether the torque limitation with torque control shall
be effective only in motive operation, only in generative operation or in both cases..

11840
P-CURRENT CONTROL
I SetpSource 1276 Setpoint source for the current setpoint with current control.

MaxSet 1993 Maximum current control setpoint value. Higher values will be limited to this maximum value.

Load 1797 Number of phases under load in case of current regulation.


Attention! With a wrong setting the calculation of the output current will also be wrong.
With setting "2AC" and "2DC" the load has to be connected between terminals U2 (for "2DC":
positive pole) and W2 (for "2DC": negative pole).

IAnaSV% 1798 Defines the normalization of an analoge setpoint value.


It is predefined to which current setpoint an analog signal of 10V/20mA shall correspond in the
selected unit . This value may be higher than "MaxSet", however with an internal limitation to
"MaxSet".

Bus SV% 1799 Defines the normalization of a bus setpoint value.


It is predefined to which current setpoint a bus signal of 0x4000 shall correspond. This value
may be higher than "MaxSet", however with an internal limitation to "MaxSet".

I SV1 2072 Constant setpoint value 1 with "ContrMode=current".

I SV2 2073 Constant setpoint value 2 with "ContrMode=current".

I SV3 2074 Constant setpoint value 3 with "ContrMode=current".

StartSV 2957 Adjustment of the start-setpoint for the current control. This setpoint is used when the external
setpoint has not yet been released see menu "P-OPERATION:P-MSC-setpoint ON".

I Add-Source 2097 Source for the additive setpoint value in the respective mode of control.

I Add-Norm 2101 The normalization factor for the additive setpoint value in the respective mode of control. The
additive setpoint value is added to the main setpoint value with the correct sign. With negative
sign you will achieve an inversion of the additive setpoint value before addition and therefore
quasi a subtraction.

f-source 2075 Selection of the source for the frequency default in the current control mode.

f analog 2076 Normalization of the analog frequency default in current control mode. 10V/20mA corresponds
with the here indicated value.

f Bus 2077 Normalization of the frequency default via bus in current control mode. 4000H corresponds with
the here indicated value.

f SV1 2078 Default of a fixed frequency value in the current control mode.

113
SINAMICS G180

t Frequ. 1203 Time for frequency integrator in the current control mode. The time of a frequency change from 0
to fmax is indicated.

13800
P-VOLTAGE CONTROL
V SetpSource 2371 Setpoint-source for the voltage setpoint value in case of voltage control.

MaxSet 2372 Maximum voltage control setpoint. Higher values are limited to this maximum value.

Load 2373 No. of loaded phases with voltage regulation.


Attention! Wrong setting results in wrong calculation of output power.
With setting "2AC" and "2DC" the load has to be connected between terminals U2 (for "2DC":
positive pole) and W2 (for "2DC": negative pole).

VAnaSV% 2374 Defines the scaling of an analog setpoint value.


It is preset to which voltage setpoint an analog signal of 10V/20mA shall correspond. This value
can be higher than "MaxSet", with an internal limitation to "MaxSet".

Bus SV% 2375 Defines the scaling of a bus setpoint value.


It is preset to which voltage setpoint an bus signal of 0x4000 shall correspond. This value can be
higher than "MaxSet", with an internal limitation to "MaxSet".

V SV1 2376 Fixed setpoint 1 in case of "ContrMode=voltage".

V SV2 2377 Fixed setpoint 2 in case of "ContrMode=voltage".

V SV3 2378 Fixed setpoint 3 in case of "ContrMode=voltage".

StartSV 2958 Adjustment of the start-setpoint for the voltage control. This setpoint is used when the external
setpoint has not yet been released see menu "P-OPERATION:P-MSC-setpoint ON".

V Add-Source 2379 Source for the additive setpoint with the respective control mode.

V Add-Norm 2380 The scaling factor for the additive setpoint with the respective control mode. The additive
setpoint is added to the main setpoint with the correct sign. With a negative evaluation you will
get an inversion of the additive setpoint priot to the addition, which actually means a subtraction.

f-source 2381 Selection of the source for the frequency default in case of operation by voltage control.

f analog 2382 Scaling of the analog frequency default in case of operation by voltage control. 10V/20mA
corresponds with the here indicated value.

f Bus 2383 Scaling of the analog frequency default via bus in case of operation by voltage control. 4000H
corresponds with the here indicated value.

f SV1 2384 Default of a fixed frequency in case of operation by voltage control.

t Frequ. 2385 Time of the frequency integrator in case of operation by voltage control. The time for a change of
frequency from 0 to fmax is indicated.

15033
P-HOIST/ROT.MEC
Engag t br. 070 Via this parameter the reacting time for mechanical brakes of lifting gears is set. With this the
inverter can control the mechanical brake in the exact moment.

t-rel mec.br. 095 This parameter is used for setting the release time of the mechanical brake of lifting-gear drives.
This enables the converter to build up a correspondingly long stop point after braking (until the
brake has definitiely been applied). For this reason, you must enter here at least the release time
of the mechanical brake being used.

114
SINAMICS G180

P PosContr. 1008 P-component (amplification) of the position controller:


by this, the position control is adapted to the different moments of inertia of the lift.
Mind: the higher the "weakening" of the drive, the higher the amplification should be (Attention:
too high values cause "unsmooth" running behaviour or too much noise in the drive during
position controlling).

R Start.torq. 2167 This parameter defines the starting torque for a setpoint in clockwise direction. The value refers
to the nominal torque of the parameterised motor.

L Start.torq. 2168 This parameter defines the starting torque for a setpoint in counter-clockwise direction. The
value refers to the nominal torque of the parameterised motor.

f-start 2176 Starting frequency if control mode = hoisting gear and motor type = asnch_SVC (encoderless
operation). In case of encoderless operation a minimum actual value of "fstart" shall be applying,
so that the inverter is activating the brake and running up to the preset setpoint.

Auto-R1-Measure 319 When set to Yes, this parameter runs an R1 measurement at every start. This will detect any
changes in the stator resistance caused by temperature changes. On systems without an actual
value feedback, this parameter shall be set to "yes" if high starting and braking torques at a low
frequency are required.

13210
P-f-TORQUE RISE
Function 2127 By parameter Mode you select whether the torque dependent calculation of the frequency is
switched off or if the calculated frequency-value is added to or subtracted from the main setpoint
value. Ensure also that the value of the frequency is calculated with the correct sign, depending
on parameter Mode.

Mode 2094 By parameter "Mode" you select whether the torque-dependent calculation of the frequency
shall be made in dependence from surpassing either a clockwise or a counterclockwise rotating
torque.
E.g. setting of torque ccw
If in ccw direction a higher torque signal arises (actual value: "T-mot r/l" is negative) than preset
in parameter "T-Start", a frequency is calculated out of the surpassing by multiplication with
surpass.
The frequency resulting herefrom can be selected as additive setpoint value by selection from n
Add-source (control mode=speed).

T-Start 2091 By this parameter you can define the torque-threshold from which the calculation of a torque-
dependent frequency shall start.

Rise 2092 By this parameter you can define the factor of the torque-dependent frequency if "T-Start" is
exceeded.

Damping 2093 Normally, a torque-dependent frequency-change causes at first an even higher torque and
therefore a direct feedback. This direct feedback resp. the rise of the frequency can be damped
by this parameter. Finally however, the higher frequency has to result in a reduction of the
required torque.

17206
P-motor data

Motor type 1022 Adjustment of the used motor and of the respective control type, e.g. "async_SVC"
(asynchronous motor with "space vector control") resp. "async_FOC" (asynchronous motor with
"field-oriented control") or e.g. "sync" ("synchronous motor").

P-motor 1984 Enter here the rated value of the motor as per type plate.
Note: If several motors are connected to the inverter, the sum of the rated motor powers of all
connected motors is to be entered.

115
SINAMICS G180

n-motor 083 That speed is to be entered as the rated motor speed, when motor is running with preset rated
motor frequency and loaded with nominal torque (type plate specification).
The correct adjustment is important particularly with field oriented control (for correct motor
saturation).
Attention: Each new setting of this parameter leads to another recalculation of the other motor
data like "I idle", "R1" etc..
Previous adjustments of these parameters are lost. Note: If several motors are connected to the
inverter, the rated motor speed of the motor with the highest performance is to be entered.

I-motor 082 As the rated motor current that current has to be set, which the motor needs if loaded with the
rated torque (type plate indication). Here, the wiring of the motor in star connection or delta
connection has to be obeyed.
Attention: Each new setting of this parameter leads to another recalculation of the other motor
data like "I idle", "R1" etc..
Previous adjustments of these parameters are lost.
Note: If several motors are connected to the inverter, the sum of the rated motor currents of all
connected motors is to be entered.

f-Motor 080 As the rated motor frequency that frequency has to be set, at which the motor has its rated
operating point according to the type plate.
Attention: Each new setting of this parameter leads to another recalculation of the other motor
data like "I idle", "R1" etc..
Adjustments made before on these parameters are lost..
Note: If several motors are connected to the inverter, the rated motor frequency of the motor with
the highest performance is to be entered.

V-motor 081 As motor rated voltage this voltage must be set, which is required for motor rated frequency
(type plate indication). With this the wiring of the motor in star connection or delta connection
has to be obeyed.
Attention: Each new setting of this parameter leads to another recalculation of the other motor
data like "I idle", "R1" etc..
Adjustments made before on these parameters are lost.

cos phi 101 For the calculation of the optimum voltage vector the "cos phi" of the motor is needed. For that,
the inverter uses a plausible standard value. With unusual motors the exact value as per data
plate should be set.
Attention: Any new setting of this parameter results in a recalculation of the other motor data like
"I idle", "R1" etc..
Previous adjustments of these parameters will be lost.
Note: If several motors are connected to the inverter, the "cos phi" of the motor with the highest
performance is to be entered.

Slipcomp 1492 With motor type "async_SVC" only:


Determines, at which percentage the calculated actual slip is compensated (0 % = no slip-
compensation, 100 % full compensation of the slip, calculated from the parameterized rated
motor speed and the actual load status).

I idle 103 This value is calculated autonomously by the device on the basis of the motor data. To achieve
a particular driving behaviour it also can be set manually.
With field-oriented controller (Motor type = "async_FOC") the correct setting is especially
important (motor saturation)!
Note: If several motors are connected to the inverter, the sum of the no-load currents of all
connected motors is to be entered.

I-breakov 2221 As pull-out protection in case of under-saturated operation (e.g. in the field weakening range) the
current limit is lowered. Here you have to set the maximum admissible current of the motor, so
that the motor will not pull out. For lowering, the set value is evaluated with the ratio of actual to
nominal motor saturation. Thus, in case of field weakening, lowering with 1/f is provided.
Note: If several motors are connected to the inverter, the maximum possible parameter value is
to be set. Pull-out protection cannot be provided if several motors are operated.

116
SINAMICS G180

ETA 106 By this parameter the rated motor efficiency is set. This value is required for a more exact
consideration of the frequency-dependent motor losses in computing the actual values "P-motor"
and "T-motor". The inverter function is not influenced by this.
Note: If several motors are connected to the inverter, the mean value of all associated motors is
to be entered.

t-exciting 2233 Here, the duration of the excitation phase for the motor (not with synchronous motors) can be
defined. This may be useful particularly for the optimization of the sequential process in case of
drives for hoisting equipment.

Fan external 2130 If the motor is fitted with forced ventilation, parameters to be set here to "yes".

T-offset 1201 Additive correction signal to the torque actual value of the inverter.
By this, the actual values "T-motor", "T-mot r/l" and "P-motor" can be calibrated, for example by
means of a torque metering shaft.
Effective direction "positive" means clockwise acting torque offset.

T-correction 1202 Correction signal with multiplying effect for the actual values "T-motor", "T-mot r/l", "P-motor".
These actual values are multiplied with the parameter value. By that, they can be calibrated, for
example, by means of a torque metering shaft.

Stabil. 1494 2-pole motors for higher frequencies tend to swinging current for no-load operation. Using the
parameter "Stabil." a current depending intervention is on the motor voltage is performed to
damp such a swinging. The parameter describes the power of the intervention "without any
units".

Auto-Tuning 1985 Prerequisit for the implementation of this function: "terminal 8" must be triggered. If the
parameter is set to "yes", a measuring current will flow through the motor for a few seconds. By
that, parameters like, e.g., the stator resistance "R1" are detected automatically.

Pulses absol. 1024 Pulses/revolution:


By this parameter the "encoder specific" no. of pulses/revolution (e.g. 64 - 4096) of the actual
encoder is parameterized.

Encd.calib.rot. 1025 If parameterized with "yes" an automatic encoder balance of "sincos" encoders can be carried
out. For that, the signal "Controller release" is required and the machine must move freely. The
zero balance is performed automatically, the offset of the encoder signal to the stator winding is
measured and automatically recorded in parameter "Sensor offset".

Encod.calib.fix 2522 With parameterizing to "yes" an automatic encoder calibration of "sincos"-encoders can be
performed. For that the signal "controller release" is required and the machine has to be firmly
braked! The null-balance of the encoder is performed automatically, the offset of the encoder
signal to the stator windings is measured and automatically registered in parameter "sensor
offset".

Sensor offset 1026 Offset of the encoder signal related to the stator winding. The value is established with
parameter "Sensor adjustment" ( =>"yes"). This value can be checked/readjusted subsequently.
Lift inverter: with the optimum "offset" value and slow running of the lift with "empty car" the
current consumption of the motor ("I-DRIVE DATA: I-motor") is only minimal.

Only if motortyp= async_FOC (field-orientated control):


Sensor 1023 Type of tacho for the actual value feedback: high-resolution incremental encoders with "HTL" or
"TTL" level (asynchronous drives) with 4096 pulses/revolution as well as "sincos analog" and
"sincos MUX" encoders (synchronous drives) may be used.

117
SINAMICS G180

Pulses/360 037 If an "HTL", "TTL" or "sincos" tacho has been chosen as encoder, the no. of pulses per each
revolution of the pulse tacho has to be set with this parameter.
With pulse numbers between 32768 and 65536 even values only may be set.
With a value between 65536 and 131070 this must be a multiple of 4 and with a value above
131070 it has to be a multiple of 8!
So-called rotary pulse-encoders or incremental encoders (for asynchronous motors) may be
used. DYNAVERT needs only the two tracks that are offset by 90°. For synchronous motors a so-
called "sincos" encoder is used.

Sensor sign. 1160 By the two possible settings "A - B" and "B - A" the connection of the encoder conductors
(encoder signals A and B) kann be swapped "software-wise".

118
SINAMICS G180

14962
P-Equival.circ.-Data

R1 1493 The value can be established by function "Auto-Tuning" (recommended).


Alternatively: When measuring with a precision ohmmeter: the R1 value is derived from
measuring between any two terminals on the fully wired-up motor (including supply line). Divide
this value by 2 to get value R1.
Note: If several motors are connected to the inverter, the required R1 has to be established by
function "Auto-tuning".
If despite the correctly established R1 ("Autotuning") starting problems occur in case of
increased breakaway torques, parameter I-idle should preferably be increased.

Xsig tot 4034 This parameter contains the complete, for the inverter "visible", inductivity of the machine which
has been established upon Autotuning.

Xd 3283 Value of resistance of stator inductivity in d-axis with nominal frequency (synchronous machine).

Xq 3284 Value of resistance of stator inductivity in q-axis with nominal frequency (synchronous machine).

Up 3285 EMF voltage at nominal speed (synchronous machine).

14797
P-MSC data

I contin. 120 With "inverter current limit" the current limit is set, which is valid as limit value for the current
limiting controller during continuous operation.

I short 121 With "inverter peak current" this current limit is set, which is fallen on no account. Using the
parameter "t short" it can be temporarily limited.

t short 122 With this parameter the time period is set, after which the current limit is reduced from inverter
peak current to inverter rated current. To realize the time range > 30 s increased cooling is
required.

Clk.freq. 1041 Pulse frequency of the output-side IGBT inverter:


There are various pulse frequency settings possible, depending on the type of inverter (max.
range 1,5 - 10,0 kHz).
Attention: the power loss of the inverter increases with the pulse frequency.
The additional motor losses and the motor noise however are decreasing with increasing pulse
frequency.
Observe, that the inverter max.current for the respective nominal pulse frequency as per
technical data does not apply to the maximum pulse frequency.

f-pulse min 2222 Here you can limit the inverter pulse frequency to a minimum value. Thus it is prevented that the
inverter, depending on temperature, will reduce the pulse frequency to lower values. This is
required with, e.g., sinusial filters resp. with high output frequencies.

119
SINAMICS G180

Overmodulat. 1996 Here, the size of the max. over-modulation can be entered that is carried out in case of high
output voltage. 0% means a pure sine-wave modulation. In fact, low-frequency harmonics are
generated (5,7 etc.) in the motor current in case of values > 0% , but the fundamential harmonic
of the motor voltage is rising.

Random Pattern 2322 By this parameter can be chosen, whether a pulse pattern without (constant pulse frequency) or
with Random-Pattern (random slightly variable pulse frequency) is generated.

PWM 2395 Defines, with which pulse pattern the converter is working:
Motor: Standard pulse pattern for motors.
Motor cp 1: optimized pulse pattern (less losses in the converter) for motors with good cos phi
(e.g. synchronous motors).
passive load: should be selected only, when controlling problems are occuring in standard
setting "motor". Especially in the case of "passive load"-setting higher voltage-peaks are to be
expected at the terminals of the load.

V-motor max. 2125 Maximum effective value of the inverter output voltage (fundamential harmonic). Input shown as
percentage of parametrized line voltage.
Although the inverter is able to generate a higher output voltage (effective value of the
fundamental harmonic ), the voltage is limited to this value.
Not effective with control mode Current
For control mode Voltage, load type DC applies the 1.41-fold value (e.g. with setting 100% and
Vline = 400V: Max. DC voltage = 564 V).

t-DC.brake 124 With "t-DC.brake" the period of time can be set, for which the dc braking is performed after
falling below the starting frequency. The time period can be parameterized between 0 s and
1000 s, for "0 s" means, no dc braking is done.

I-DC.brake 123 In case of the inverter falls below the starting frequency when braking, the drive can be broken
down to the complete standstill using dc braking.

11863
P-PULSE INPUT
Mode 1780 Operation mode of the pulse input:
inactive: X2:27/:28/:29 working as digital inputs.
f < 20 kHz: X2:28 for measuring of pulses up to max. 20 kHz. X2:27/:29 working as digital inputs.
f > 20 kHz: x2:27 for measuring of pulses up to max. 205 kHz. X2:28/:29 are inactive,
Tacho 1 track: speed-measurement with tacho at X2:28. X2:27/:29 working as digital inputs.
Max. pulse frequency 20 kHz.
Tacho 2 track: X2:27/:28 for evaluation of a pulse tacho. X2:29 is inactive. Max. pulse frequency
205 kHz.

AftDecPoint 1781 Digits after comma for setpoint Frequ.-Set (kHz) resp. Tacho-Set (rpm).

Max.plse. 1782 Maximum value of pulse input (as a frequency in kHz resp. speed in rpm, depending on the
mode).

Pulses/360 1783 Pulses per revolution per each track in case of pulse tacho.

Pulse rise 1788 Zero-point rise of the pulse input.

CharactCrv 1789 Describes the way of internal processing of the pulse input :
"original": Unchanged imaging of the input value on the internal value (ascending straight line ).
"negated": A positive input value is imaged on a negative internal value of same amount and
vice versa (descending straight line).
"invert.":
Input value is zero = imaging on the pos. max. value.
Input value is pos.max.value = imaging on zero .
Input value is neg. max.value = imaging on zero (within the region of negative input values -
ascending straight line from zero to max.value; within the region of positive input values -
descending straight line from max.value to zero ).

120
SINAMICS G180

Centre point 1790 Center-point rise for pulse input.


Typical application: Unipolar input for operation in both senses of rotation.
0 … 0,5*max.pulse = counter-clockwise running; 0,5*max.pulse = speed zero; 0,5*max.pulse …
max.pulse = clockwise running.

Pulse mon. 1791 Monitoring threshold of the pulse input.

15008
P-INV. BEHAVIOUR
MCfunc 151 This parameter tells the converter at which point is should begin to use mains contector. If this
parameter is not set to "inactiv", it effects undervoltage recognition.

SwiInterlock 536 The starting lock-out status is an inverter status that will be quit only when the command OFF 1
is cancelled. The parameter defines when the inverter remains in the starting lock-out status:
With operating source = BUS the inverter will behave independently from this parameterizing as
with the settting "always".
"off": The FI never remains in the starting lock-out status.
"on": The FI remains in the starting lock-out status after an OFF 2 command or an emergency
stop command.
"always" or operating source = BUS: After a fault the FI remains in the starting lock-out status,
an OFF 2 command or an emergency stop command.

Synchron. 1464 This parameter determines the behaviour of the inverter regarding speed synchronization in the
process of switching-on . The possible settings are "off", "on" und "always" :
"off": The speed synchronization is switched off. Upon switching-on, the inverter will always
start pulsing with rotary field frequency "0" Hz . If switched upon a running machine, this will be
decelerated to approx. 0 Hz, comparable to a DC-braking and after that will be accelerated to
the setpoint.
"on": The speed synchronization is activated. The inverter will try to find the speed of the
machine within the admissible frequency range in order to accelerate it from this speed up to the
setpoint value. If the speed of the machine is not found (e.g. "standstill" or outside the
"admissible frequency range"), speed synchronization will be stopped and the inverter will restart
from position "off". If the machine was before decelerated in the guided mode to speed "0" , no
synchronization is performed with the next activation.
"always": In this case, the synchronization process is started even if the machine was to the last
decelerated in the guided mode to speed "0" . Utilization e.g. with fans which are driven by the
natural draft.
"SetVal": The inverter will try, starting from the set speed setpoint at the moment of controller
release, to find the speed of the machine within the admissible frequency range, in order to
accelerate it starting from this speed up to the actual setpoint . Particularly upon restart after an
operation in the lower speed range this behaviour may save synchronization time.

buffering 225 If there is a mains failure, the energy required for operating the converter is taken from the
kinetic energy of the drive.
off : no backup supply on mains failure
on : backup supply until mains supply is restored or until drive speed = 0
t-restart: backup supply at most until time specified in "t-restart".

Set.value 221 In case of a mains failure, by means of this parameter the present setpoint value is either reset
to zero or maintained by saving.

Operation 227 By this parameter the behaviour of the FI, in case of a change-over of the operating source, can
be determined.
After the change-over the FI reacts to the operating default set by the new operating source.
"takeover": Maintaining of the last operating condition and takeover of the required operating
commands incl. the setting of the appropriate internal locking for the buttons.
"Reset": The operating commands are removed at the moment of change-over. Thus, an
operating FI is shut down and taken into "switch interlock"-condition.

t-restart 222 Basically, this parameter determines the behaviour of the inverter in case of short mains failures.
Within this outage time the last setpoint value and all latch circuits are frozen at an undervoltage.
In case of a long lasting mains failure no automatic restart will be performed.

17128
P-distrb.charact.

121
SINAMICS G180

Lowvolt. 229 The device behaviour for mains voltage failure is determined.
Store: under voltage failure is stored.
Auto.reset: under voltage failure is automatically quitted.
Mains off: each mains off is intended; no failure storing fault reset.
FaultReset; reset of all faults.

Auto.reset 2454 This parameter defines whether an automatic fault message acknowledgement shall be carried
out:
off: No automatic acknowledgement.
Overvolt.: Only "Fault overvoltage" will be automatically acknowledged.
Failures: All faults are acknowledged with the fault text "fault".
all: All faults are acknowledged.

max.conf.attmpts 2455 This parameter defines the maximum no. of automatic acknowledgements. If faults occur in a
number of "max.conf.attmpts" in intervals of less than one hour, no faults are acknowledged
automatically any longer.

FltReact. 3979 This parameter is influencing the behaviour of the device upon occurence of a fault. Depending
on the severity of the fault it may be that the parameterized behaviour is not possible.
immed. off: In case of a fault the inverter is switched off instantaneously. (standard behaviour)
MSC ramp: In case of a fault the machine is still ramped down to the standstill and then is
switched off.
LSC n. off: The line-side power inverter is not switching off in case of a fault. If possible, it will
remain on, MSC will switch off.
M_rmp N_on: The machine is ramped up, the line-side power inverter remains on.

T-plateau 3981 This parameter defines the torque level on which the tripping ramp is passing a plateau
(T=constant) . In the process, a percentage of the operating torque will be set when the fault
occurs.

t-ramp 1 3983 This parameter defines the period of time of the first tripping-ramp section . The section begins
on occurence of the fault and will end when the plateau is reached.

t-plateau 3982 This parameter defines the period of time of the plateau (T=constant) in the tripping-ramp.

t-ramp 2 3984 This parameter defines the period of time of the second tripping-ramp section . The section
begins on the elapse of "t-plateau" and is ending with the standstill of the machine.

11837
P-EXTRAS
Language 206 This parameter sets the language of the inverter display texts.

Parameterset 205 You can select and store 4 complete parameter sets. All 4 parameter sets are pre-assigned with
the factory setting. If you change a parameter, it is only changed in the parameter set selected at
that moment. You can copy the factory setting to the parameter set selected at any time in
accordance with "Factory parameters".

Menu 1010 Only the menues relevant to the selected menu level (e.g. commissioning, standard etc.) are
viewable, which increases traceability.

Date 204 Date of the inverter internal real-time clock.

Time 203 Time of the inverter internal real-time-clock.

122
SINAMICS G180

t-disp.lighting 3737 Time, in seconds, after which the display illumination is switched off, starting from the last
pressing of a button.
0 = illumination is permanently on.

Comment 2524 This parameter has no affect on the behaviour of the inverter. It serves only to enter a comment
(e.g. a system-specific inverter designation etc.). Here, a text with a length of up to 20 characters
can be entered. This text is saved along with the saving of the parameter set and, upon
transmission, again parameterized accordingly in the inverter. The entered text is indicated on
the inverter display by the actual value I-INVERTER DATA\I-device data\C.

Initialization 8283 If this parameter is set to "yes", the inverter starts another initialization.
Attention: thereby the communication with the inverter will be interrupted. Outputs can change
their status.

12539
P-TimeSynchr.
SynchTime 1531 Setting of the time to which the internal clock shall be set when triggered by the "SynchBit".

SynchBit 1533 Setting of the bit that causes the time-synchronization with ascending slope.

13235
P-opr.counter
ON-bit 2111 By this parameter you can select the bit by which the ON-hours meter (act value ON-hrs.) is
triggered.

ON-hrs. 2109 With this parmeter you can set the actual value "ON-hrs." to the desired value. So, for instance,
after a first initialization where the counter was reset, the operating hours counter can be reset to
the former value or a new starting value can be entered.

Opr.-Bit 2110 By this parameter you can select the bit by which the operating-hours meter (act value Opr.-hrs.)
is triggered.

13671
P-LOGIC ELEMENTS
11898
P-SELF-HOLDING

The self-holding feature is for the conversion of a key function into a static
signal, i.e. it is a flipflop. Any self-holding feature has three inputs:
On: On-key = Set-function of the flipflop (high-active)
Off0: Off-key = Reset-function of the flipflop (low-active).
Off1: Off-key = Reset-function of the flipflop (high-active).
Normally, at On the On-key is connected and at Off0 the Off-key. The Off1
is used to reset the flipflop by the inverter if it wants to reset the
selfholding
feature. For that, three bit signals are available:
Reset OFF1 Reset for OFF1-commands
ResRelease Reset for controllerrelease commands
ResetSpeed Reset for speed-ON commands
The output signals of the self-holding features are available in the bit-pool
for further usage.

12547
P-Self holding 1

123
SINAMICS G180

On 1535 Determines, which signal (usually a terminal) shall be used as ON-key for self-holding function 1.

Off0 1536 Determines, which signal (usually a terminal: maker) shall be used as OFF-key for self-holding
function 1.

Off1 1537 Determines, which signal (maker) shall be used as OFF-key for the self-holding function 1.
Usually, a reset signal generated by the FI is used (according to the operating command for
which the self-holding function is used). These are: "Reset OFF1" operating command OFF1),
"ResRelease" (operating command controller release) and "ResetSpeed" (operating command
speed ON).

12548
P-Self holding 2
12551
… P-Self holding 5
dito dito

13674
P-linkages
Linkages are for the logic linking of digital signals. One linkage element has four equivalent inputs. The kind of
linkage can be selected.
The output-bit Linkage1 is available in the general bit-pool and shows, depending from the selected function, the
following condition:
OR / NOR
Inp.1 Inp.2 Inp.3 Inp.4 Linkage1 at OR NOR
0 0 0 0 0 1
all other combinations: 1 0
If less than 4 signals are OR/NOR-linked, unassigned inputs are to be laid to LOW or one input signal is to be
multiple-assigned.
AND / NAND
Inp.1 Inp.2 Inp.3 Inp.4 Linkage1 at AND NAND
1 1 1 1 1 0
all other combinations: 0 1
If less than 4 signals are AND/NAND-linked, unassigned inputs are to be laid to HIGH or one input signal is to
be multiple-assigned.
XOR / XNOR
Inp.1 Inp.2 Inp.3 Inp.4 Linkage1 at XOR XNOR
0 0 0 0 0 1
1 1 1 1 0 1
all other combinations: 1 0
In case of linkage with XOR/XNOR each input is to be assigned to a signal. If less than 4 signals are
XOR/XNOR-linked, one signal shall be assigned to several inputs

13675
P-linkage1
Inp. 1 2271 Linkages are required for logical linking of digital signals. A linkage element is fitted with four
equivalent inputs. This parameter descibes the connection of input 1 of linkage element 1.

Inp. 2 2272 Linkages are required for logical linking of digital signals. A linkage element is fitted with four
equivalent inputs. This parameter descibes the connection of input 2 of linkage element 1.

Inp. 3 2273 Linkages are required for logical linking of digital signals. A linkage element is fitted with four
equivalent inputs. This parameter descibes the connection of input 3 of linkage element 1.

Inp. 4 2274 Linkages are required for logical linking of digital signals. A linkage element is fitted with four
equivalent inputs. This parameter descibes the connection of input 4 of linkage element 1.

Function 2275 Linkages are required for logical linking of digital signals. A linkage element is fitted with four
equivalent inputs. This parameter descibes (for linkage 1) by which logic operator (and, or etc.)
the four inputs are linked.

13676
P-linkage2
13682
… P-linkage8
dito dito

124
SINAMICS G180

16331
P-bit change monit.
Input 3708 Choice of the binary information which must change cyclically the value from 0 to 1 and back. If
no change occurs within the parameterized time, the bit "bit change" is set in the bit pool.

t-bit change 3709 Maximum time within the selected binary information must change the value. If no change
occurs within the parameterized time, the bit "bit change" is set in the bit pool.

15023
P-OPERATION
Opr. 1738 This parameter determines the functionality of the operating functions (i.e. of all digital inputs on
the control electronic board and the periphery board). Hereby, various standard configurations
(e.g. Standard, Namur etc.) can be chosen. If these settings are changed by modification of sub-
parameters (e.g. P-OPERATION:P-controller release: Local), the actual setting of the
parameters is extended by "spec."

MainsFlt 1495 This input determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating function "mains failure".
Upon activation of this operating function, all the other digital inputs of the inverter are "frozen" at
the actual status. The inverter goes to controller lock-out. Additionally, the restart-time is started.
This input can be used, in connection with an automatical restart, for the suppression of
undesired changes at the terminal inputs.

Feedb.MC 1346 Selection of the signal source for the main contactor feedback (auxiliary making contact). If it is a
motor-side contactor, a feedback is definitely required. In case of a mains-side contactor the
parameter can also be on "inactiv".

12394
P-Off1 (NC)
Local 1301 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operation mode "Off 1" at "Op.-
source". The commands P-OPERATION:P-Off1: global 1 and global 2 must be set additionally
resp. inactive.

Remote 1302 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operation mode "OFF 1" at "Op.-
source=Remote". The commands P-OPERATION:P-Off1: global 1 and global 2 must be set
additionally resp. inactive.

Bus 2880 This parameter defines the bit by means of which the respective operating function is preset in
operating source = BUS. The commands Global 1 and Global 2 have to be set additionally or
shall be inactive.

Global 1 1303 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operation mode "OFF 1". This
signal is always active, independent from the operating source. Additionally, the operating
commands for the actual operating source and global 2 ( P-OPERATION:Off1: Local, Remote
and global 2) must be set.

Global 2 1304 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operation mode "OFF 1". This
signal is always active, independent from the operating source. Additionally, the operating
commands for the actual operating source and global 1 ( P-OPERATION:Off1: Local, Remote
and global 1) must be set.

Displayed ind. 2134 Definition whether message text "!!OFF1!! Operation" shall be displayed in case OFF1 is
activated.

14896
P-LSC ON
Local 2885 This parameter defines the signal (usually a terminal) for the respective operating function in
case of operating source = local. The commands Global 1 and Global 2 have to be set
additionally or shall be inactive.

Remote 2886 This parameter defines the signal (usually a terminal) for the respective operating function in
case of operating source = remote. The commands Global 1 and Global 2 have to be set
additionally or shall be inactive.

Bus 2887 This parameter defines the bit by which the operating source = BUS is preset. The commands
Global 1 and Global 2 have to be set additionally or shall be inactive.

125
SINAMICS G180

Global 1 2888 This parameter defines the signal (usually a terminal) for the respective operating function. This
signal is always active, independent from the operating source. Additionally, the operating
commands for the active operating source and Global 2 must be given.

Global 2 2889 This parameter defines the signal (usually a terminal) for the respective operating function. This
signal is always active, independent from the operating source. Additionally, the operating
commands for the active operating source and Global 1 must be given.

12392
P-ContrlRelease
Local 1293 This parameter determines the signal (e.g. self-holding function of the internal keys ) for the
operation mode "Controller release" at "OP.-source = Local". The commands P-OPERATION:P-
Controller release: global 1 and global 2 must be set additionally.

Remote 1294 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal ) for the operation mode "Controller
release" at "OP.-source = Remote". The commands P-OPERATION:P-Controller release:
global 1 and global 2 must be set additionally.

Bus 2878 This parameter defines the bit by means of which the respective operating function is preset in
operating source = BUS. The commands Global 1 and Global 2 have to be set additionally or
shall be inactive.

Global 1 1295 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal ) for the operation mode "Controller
release". This signal is always active, independent from the operation source. Additionally, the
operating commands for the actual operating source and global 2 (P-OPERATION:P-Controller
release: Local, Remote, global 2) must be given.

Global 2 1296 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal ) for the operation mode "Controller
release". This signal is always active, independent from the operation source. Additionally, the
operating commands for the actual operating source and global 1 (P-OPERATION:P-Controller
release: Local, Remote, global 1) must be given.

12393
P-Speed on
Local 1297 This parameter determines the signal (e.g. self-holding function of the internal keys) for the
operation mode "Speed on" at "Op.-source=Local". The commands P-OPERATION:P-Speed
on: global 1 and global 2 must be set additionally.

Remote 1298 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operation mode "P-Speed on"
at "Op.-source=Remote". The commands P-OPERATION:P-Speed ON: global 1 and global 2
must be set additionally.

Bus 2879 This parameter defines the bit by means of which the respective operating function is preset in
operating source = BUS. The commands Global 1 and Global 2 have to be set additionally or
shall be inactive.

Global 1 1299 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operation mode "P-Speed on".
This signal is always active, independent from the operating source. Additionally, the operating
commands for the actual operating source and global 2 ( P-OPERATION:P-Speed on: Local,
Remote and global 2) must be set.

Global 2 1300 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operation mode "P-Speed on".
This signal is always active, independent from the operating source. Additionally, the operating
commands for the actual operating source and global 1 ( P-OPERATION:P-Speed on: Local,
Remote and global 1) must be set.

11982
P-Reset
Local 1206 This parameter determines the signal for the operating mode "Reset" at Op.-source = Local
(normally internal key).

Remote 1207 This parameter determines the signal for the reset operating function at Op.-source = Remote
(usually a terminal).

Bus 2881 This parameter defines the bit by means of which the respective operating function is preset in
operating source = BUS.

126
SINAMICS G180

Global 1 1209 This parameter determines the signal for the reset operating (usually a terminal). The input is
continuously active, independently from the operating source.

Global 2 1210 This parameter determines the signal for the reset operating (usually a terminal). The input is
continuously active, independently from the operating source.

12396
P-Emerg. stop (NC)
Bus 2882 This parameter defines the bit by means of which the respective operating function is preset in
operating source = BUS.

Global 1 1307 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating mode "Emerg. Stop"
(Emergency stop). This input is always active, independently from the operating source.

Global 2 1308 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating mode "Emerg. Stop"
(Emergency stop). This input is always active, independently from the operating source.

12397
P-Off2 (NC)
Bus 2883 This parameter defines the bit by means of which the respective operating function is preset in
operating source = BUS.

Global 1 1309 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating mode "OFF 2". This
input is always active, independently from the operating source.

Global 2 1310 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating mode "OFF 2". This
input is always active, independently from the operating source.

T1 2135 Definition of message text line 1 in case OFF2 is activated.

T2 2136 Definition of message text line 2 in case OFF2 is activated.

12398
P-int.ctrl.inhib.
Local 1311 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating mode "Internal
control inhibit" at Op.-source=Local. If "Internal control inhibit" is activated, control inhibit. is
generated. However, all self-holding functions remain operative.

Remote 1312 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating mode "Internal
control inhibit" at Op.-source=Remote. If "Internal control inhibit" is activated, control inhibit. is
generated. However, all self-holding functions remain operative.

Global 1 1313 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating mode "Internal
control inhibit". This input is always active, independently from the operating source. However,
all self-holding functions for the operating commands remain operative.

Global 2 1314 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating mode "Internal
control inhibit". This input is always active, independently from the operating source. However,
all self-holding functions for the operating commands remain operative.

12500
P-int.speed off
Local 1460 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating function "Internal
Speed OFF" at Op.-source = Local. If Internal Speed OFF is activated, Speed OFF is generated.
However, all self-holding functions for the operating commands will remain.

Remote 1461 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating function "Internal
Speed OFF" at Op.-source = Remote. If Internal Speed OFF is activated, Speed OFF is
generated. However, all self-holding functions for the operating commands will remain.

Global 1 1462 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating function "Internal
Speed OFF". This input is always active, independently from the operating source. However, all
self-holding functions for the operating commands will remain.

Global 2 1463 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating function "Internal
Speed OFF". This input is always active, independently from the operating source. However, all
self-holding functions for the operating commands will remain.

127
SINAMICS G180

14946
P-MSC-setpoint ON
Local 2965 This parameter defines the signal (normally a terminal) by which the setpoint of the selected
control mode of machine-side converter MSC at operating source = Local is released. As long
as the setpoint is not released, the respective "StartSV" is used.

Remote 2966 This parameter defines the signal (normally a terminal) by which the setpoint of the selected
control mode of machine-side converter MSC at operating source = Remote is released. As long
as the setpoint is not released, the respective "StartSV" is used.

Bus 2967 This parameter defines the bit by which, at operating source = BUS, the setpoint of the selected
control mode of line-side converter MSC is released.

12395
P-Reversing
Local 1305 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating mode "Reversing" at
Op.-source = Local.

Remote 1306 This parameter determines the signal (usually a terminal) for the operating mode "Reversing" at
Op.-source = Remote.

Bus 1200 Selection of the bit that triggers the function "reversing" at "Op.-source=BUS".

12501
P-Motorpoti
Up 1466 Selection of the signal source for the UP-key of the motor poti. The motor poti actually is only
active if the set value source is set at "Mpoti".

Down 1467 Selection of the signal source for the DOWN-key of the motor poti. The motor poti actually is
only active if the set value source is set at "Mpoti".

11899
P-MESSAGE-GEN MESS

Signal generators MLD are for inverting and time-delaying of any binary
signal. Thereby the binary signal will be delayed at first (time-delay can
be adjusted seperately with ascending or descending slope) and then
inverted if necessary.

12630
P-MessgGen MESS 1
Input 1607 Preparation of message 1 prior to further processing. The message (binary information FI) can
be chosen from a selection of individual faults, warnings, messages, terminal inputs etc..

TD: 0->1 1619 Parameterization for a desired delay in time on generation of the message.

TD: 1->0 1631 Parameterization for a desired delay in time on withdrawal of the message.

Inversion 1643 The value of the binary information can be inverted by parameterization of "on" (e.g. for switch-
over of operating-current principle/closed-circuit principle).

upon inhib. 2002 By this parameter the value of the output bit of the message generator with inverter being cut-out
(=inhibition) is set.
There can be chosen whether the output bit shall be a fix "ON", "OFF" or shall depend on the
condition of the message generator.

12631
P-MessgGen MESS 2
13109
… P-MessgGen MESS 20
dito dito

128
SINAMICS G180

11903
P-MESSAGE-GEN COMP
Message generators COMP are for comparision of continuous signals
(e.g. I-Motor, n-Motor etc.) to defined threshhold values of discrete
signals (e.g. operating source, setpoint-source etc.) with defined
comparative values.
Comparison of continuous signals:
Here, lower (<) and higher (>) are available as relational operators.
Additionally, a hysteresis can be set. In case of bi-polar signals also a
sum can be formed before the comparison.

The following graphs demonstrate the behaviour of the output signal.

12512
P-MessgGen COMP 1
1485 By signal generator COMP 1 (comparison) actual values of the FI are monitored for a free
selectable threshold. The actual value can also be a text parameter. It is displayed as a three-
fold parameter, the displayed unit adapts automatically.

< 1486 Comparison-operator functions for numerical values are ">" (greater) resp. "<" (smaller) and for
texts "=" (equal) resp. "!" (unequal).

1487 Parameter values resp. texts to which comparison shall be made. The indicated unit adapts
automatically.

Hyst. 1488 Desired hysteresis between setting and resetting of the comparison message (Text parameters
don't need a hysteresis !).

TD: 0->1 1489 Parameterizing for a desired time delay upon generation of the message.

TD: 1->0 1490 Parameterizing for a desired time delay upon withdrawal of the message.

Absolute value 1491 The parameter "Absolute value" is relevant for +/- signals only . That allows to select whether
before the comparison the absolute value of the signal is generated (="yes") or if the signal itself
is used (="no").

upon inhib. 2014 By this parameter the value of the output bit of the message generator with inverter being cut-out
(=inhibition) is set.
There can be chosen whether the output bit shall be a fix "ON", "OFF" or shall depend on the
condition of the message generator.

P-MessgGen COMP 2 12513


12578
… P-MessgGen COMP 8
dito dito

16569
P-bit generator 1

129
SINAMICS G180

M 3788 Here, the selection of the binary information (e.g. individual warning or fault) or the message
group (several warnings or faults) is performed, from which the respective Bit GenBit1-20 is
derived.

System 3789 Here can be selected by which systems the selected input information parameter "M" will be
regarded to generate the respective Bit GenBit1-20.

P-bit generator 2 16570


16588
… P-bit generator 20
dito dito

11904
P-PARAMETER SWITCH
12609
P-ParamSwitch 1
Input 1558 By parameter switch parameters can be switched-over from their original value to an alternative
value.
With parameter "Input" the binary information triggering the parameter switch is selected. If the
binary information is 0/false, the original value is active - if it is 1/true the alternative value is
active.
If the same parameter is switched over to an alternative value by a number of parameter
switches, the parameter switch with the lowest number dominates (priorisation).

Par. 1570 With a parameter switch parameters can be switched-over from their original value to an
alternative value.
With parameter "Par." that parameter is selected which shall be switched over from its original
value to an alternative value.
If the same parameter is switched over to an alternative value by a number of parameter
switches the parameter switch with the lowest number dominates (priorisation).

AV 1582 With a parameter switch parameters can be switched-over from their original value to an
alternative value.
With parameter "AV" that alternative value is set to which the parameter switch shall be switched
upon triggering of the parameter switch.
If the same parameter is switched over to an alternative value by a number of parameter
switches, the parameter switch with the lowest number dominates (priorisation).

12610
P-ParamSwitch 2
12620
… P-ParamSwitch 12
dito dito

11910
P-DIGITAL OUTPUTS
Relay 1 1315 Selection of the signal which shall be put out to relay 1 (terminal X2:37/38/39).

Relay 2 1316 Selection of the signal which shall be put out to relay 2 (terminal X2:41/42).

Relay 3 1317 Selection of the signal which shall be put out to relay 3 (terminal X2:30/31).

Relay 4 1318 Selection of the signal which shall be put out to relay 4 (terminal X2:32/33).

Relay 5 2079 Selection of the signal which shall be put out to relay 5 (terminal X2:43/44/45, being on the
peripheral PCB).

Relay 6 2080 Selection of the signal which shall be put out to relay 6 (terminal X2:46/47, being on the
peripheral PCB).

Relay 7 2081 Selection of the signal which shall be put out to relay 7 (terminal X2:48/49, being on the
peripheral PCB).

LED 1 1319 Selection of the signal which shall be put out to LED 1 (LED "Ready").

LED 2 1320 Selection of the signal which shall be put out to LED 2 (LED "Working").

15045
P-outputs sys.1 MSC
OC X82:4 1325 Selection of the signal that shall be output to the open-collector-output X82:4 (available only in
devices with minimum one system).

OC X82:5 1326 Selection of the signal that shall be output to the open-collector-output X82:5 (available only in
devices with minimum one system).

130
SINAMICS G180

OC X82:6 1327 Selection of the signal that shall be output to the open-collector-output X82:6 (available only in
devices with minimum one system).

OC X82:7 1328 Selection of the signal that shall be output to the open-collector-output X82:7 (available only in
devices with minimum one system).

OC X82:8 1329 Selection of the signal that shall be output to the open-collector-output X82:8 (available only in
devices with minimum one system).

OC X82:9 3579 Selection of the signal that shall be output to the open-collector-output X82:9 (available only in
devices with minimum one system).

15046
P-outputs sys.2 MSC
14726
… P-outputs sys.7 MSC
dito dito

11893
P-ANALOG OUTPUTS
11896
P-Analog output 1
Value 480 Actual value delivered at the analog output 1.

100% 481 Scaling of the analog output 1.

0% 1997 This parameter determines, in conjunction with parameter "100%", the range of values of the
signal which is read out to analog output 1.

mA-zero 1192 Typical setting: 0.0 mA or 4.0 mA.


For exact tuning to the connected indicator device any other value between 0 and +10 mA can
also be entered.

Smoothing 492 Smoothing of the analog output 1.

Centre point 1060 For the output of bipolar signals, this value is to be set to "yes". Thus, the analog output at signal
value zero is half-modulated. Wit negative signal values the output signal goes toward zero, with
a positive one toward full modulation (Reasonable e.g. in case of sequential control; see also
parameter "centre point" of the analoge inputs).

11897
P-Analog output 2
Value 483 Actual value delivered at the analog output 2.

100% 484 Scaling of the analog output 2.

0% 1998 This parameter determines, in conjunction with parameter "100%", the range of values of the
signal which is read out to analog output 2.

mA-zero 1061 Typical setting : 0.0 mA or 4.0 mA.


For accurate tuning to the connected indicator device also any optional values between -10 and
+10 mA can be entered.

Smoothing 493 Smoothing of the analog output 2.

Centre point 1062 For the output of bipolar signals, this value is to be set to "yes". Thus, the analog output at signal
value zero is half-modulated. Wit negative signal values the output signal goes toward zero, with
a positive one toward full modulation (Reasonable e.g. in case of sequential control; see also
parameter "centre point" of the analoge inputs).

Option:
13202
P-Analog output 3
13203
… P-Analog output 4
dito dito

131
SINAMICS G180

12541
P-ANALOG INPUTS
11894
P-Analog input 1
AI-function 1094 To the analog inputs 4 different functions can be assigned:
- Analog: Analog input (e.g. for the setpoint)
- PTC: PTC thermistor input ( for the motor temperature monitoring).
- KTY84: For the connection of a temperature sensor Type KTY84/130.
- PT100: NTC thermistor (for the motor temperature monitoring).
Caution on connection of temperature sensors: The analog inputs don't have a "safe separation"
against the control electronics and the interfaces! This has to be performed by possibly
connected temperature sensors .

mA-zero 1058 Zero-point raising analog input 1.

CharactCrv 1027 Describes how an incomming set value is processed internally:


"original": Unchanged imaging of the incomming set value upon the internal value (ascending
straight line).
"negated": An incomming positive set value is imaged upon a negative internal value of same
size, and vice versa (descending straight line).
"inverted":
Incomming positive set value is zero = imaging upon pos. max.value.
Incomming positive set value is pos. max. value = imaging upon zero.
Incomming set value is neg. max. value = imaging upon zero (within the range of negative
incomming set values is an ascending straight line from zero to the max. value; within the range
of negative incomming set values the straight line is descending from max. value to zero ).

Centre point 1072 Centre-point raising for the analog input 1.


Typical application: Unipolar set value source (0..20mA) for operation in both rotating directions.
0...10 mA = CCW-run; 10 mA = zero-speed; 10...20 mA = CW-run.

nein A = (+1) * E
ja A = -Emax + |2*E|
mA-limit 1092 Monitoring threshold of the analog input 1.

R-SensrLine 2166 In order to increase the accuracy of the temperature measurement with sensor type KTY84 or
PT100 at the analog input 1, the actual resistance of the feeder line must be set here.

Bal. sensor 3520 By this parameter the conductor resistance of the temperature sensor at analog input 1 (KTY84-
130 or PT100 resp.) can be balanced automatically. For that, the actual temperature has to be
set with temperature sensor connected. The parameter R-SensrLine will be adapted
automatically.

132
SINAMICS G180

11895
P-Analog input 2
dito, ohne/without:
R-SensrLine 2166 In order to increase the accuracy of the temperature measurement with sensor type KTY84 or
PT100 at the analog input 1, the actual resistance of the feeder line must be set here.

15272
P-Analog inp. MSC 1
mA-zero 1507 Only with cabinet-mounted devices:
Zero-point raising for analog input system 1.

CharactCrv 1508 Only with cabinet-mouted devices:


Describes, how an incoming set value is processed internally:
"original": Unchanged imaging of the incoming set value onto the internal value (ascending
straight-line).
"negated": A positive incoming set value is imaged onto a negative internal value of the same
amount, and vice versa (descending straight-line).
"inverted":
Incoming set value zero = imaging onto pos. max. value.
Incoming set value pos. max. value = imaging onto zero.
Incoming set valueneg. Maxwert = imaging onto zero (in the range of negative incoming set
values: ascending straight-line from zero to max. value; In the range of positive incoming set
values: descending straight-line from max. value to zero).

Centre point 1509 Only with cabinet-mounted devices:


Zero-point raising for analog input system 1.
Typical application: Uni-polar set value source (0..20mA) for operation in both rotating directions.
0...10 mA = CCW running; 10 mA = speed zero; 10...20 mA = CW-running.

mA-limit 1510 Only with cabinet-mounted devices:


Monitoring threshold of analog input system 1.

15273
P-Analog inp. MSC 2
15278
… P-Analog inp. MSC 7
dito dito

11905
P-TEXT ACT. VALUES
T1 1750 Text actual values can be parameterized as indicator texts to the status display (e.g.
messages/fault texts). The texts are available from a selection of standardized text moduls and
from the free programmable individual texts (parameterizing only via IMS). Additionally, an
alternative value, that is another text can be assigned operatively to the selected text actual
value via parameter switch.

T2 1751 Text actual values can be parameterized as indicator texts to the status display (e.g.
messages/fault texts). The texts are available from a selection of standardized text moduls and
from the free programmable individual texts (parameterizing only via IMS). Additionally, an
alternative value, that is another text can be assigned operatively to the selected text actual
value via parameter switch.

T3 1752 Text actual values can be parameterized as indicator texts to the status display (e.g.
messages/fault texts). The texts are available from a selection of standardized text moduls and
from the free programmable individual texts (parameterizing only via IMS). Additionally, an
alternative value, that is another text can be assigned operatively to the selected text actual
value via parameter switch.

T4 1753 Text actual values can be parameterized as indicator texts to the status display (e.g.
messages/fault texts). The texts are available from a selection of standardized text moduls and
from the free programmable individual texts (parameterizing only via IMS). Additionally, an
alternative value, that is another text can be assigned operatively to the selected text actual
value via parameter switch.

12781
P-PROGRAMMABLE TEXT

133
SINAMICS G180

P1 1740 Programmable individual text 1. This can be free programmed and used as induvidual text for
various text displays (messages, warnings etc.). Parameterizing is possible via IMS only, a
desired assignment (selection of the text P_TEXT ACT. VALUES:T1..T4) can also be made via
LCD.

P2 bis P10 dito

134
SINAMICS G180

11906
P-MESSAGES

When activated, messages indicate a two-line-text on the LCD-Display


(Line 1 to 2). The message is displayed only if presently no message with
higher priority is acute (e. g. a fault message). Otherwise the message
has no influence on the inverter. Within the range of messages messages
1 has the lowest priority and messages 8 has the highest. For activating a
message, the bit signals are available. The two texts for line 1 and 2 can
be selected seperately. There is a selection of standardized texts and
programmized texts. The programmized texts can only be modified with
the PC program IMS via the seriell interface of the inverter. Already
stored texts can be selected as message texts via the control panel.

11928
P-message 1
Input 1182 Selection of signal source for message 1. Messages are indicated in two lines in the status
display (call via bit-functionality), provided that no message, warning or fault of higher priority is
indicated. The texts of the messages can be selected separately for line 1 and line 2.

T1 1468 Text for message 1 in the 1st line. The text of the message can be chosen from a selection of
standardized texts or from the parameterisable individual texts.

T2 1476 Text for message 1 in the 2nd line. The text of the message can be chosen from a selection of
standardized texts or from the parameterisable individual texts.
11929
P-message 2
11935
… P-message 8
dito dito

11907
P-WARNINGS

Warnings are generating a warning text on the display and activate the common warning.
The warning text is displayed only if presently no message with higher priority is acute
(e.g. a fault message). Within the range of warnings Warning 1 has the lowest priority
and Warning 8 the highest. The common warning however will always be set. Moreover,
an entry is made in the event memory.
In case of a warning, in line 1 of the LCD always the text "WARNING" is shown,
complemented by the system if necessary (high-performance devices are set up by
connecting several low-performance power sections (systems) in parallel. In order to be
able to localize faults or warnings precisely, the text is complemented by the system no.
in case of faults or warnings). In case of programmable warnings it is possible to
determine by the System-parameter, which system information shall be displayed (0 = no
system information). The text for line 2 can be selected separately. There is a selection of
standardized texts and of programmable texts. The programmable texts can be modified
only with the PC-program IMS via the serial interface of the inverter. Already stored texts
however can be selected as warning texts by means of the keypad.
For the activation of a message the bit signals of the bit-pool are available.

11936
P-warning 1
Input 1359 Selection of the signal source for warning 1. Warnings are indicated on the status display (call
via Bit-functinality), if no warning or fault of higher priority is indicated or is actually active. The
first line shows always "!! Prewarning !!“, the text in the second line can be chosen. In case of a
warning, always the internal bit "collective warning“ is set.

T 1379 Selection of the desired display text (second line) for warning 1. The text can be chosen from a
selection of standardized texts or from the parameterizable individual texts.

System 1399 Indication of the system, if required.

135
SINAMICS G180

11937
P-warning 2
12448
… P-warning 20
dito dito

11908
P-FAILURES
Faults are generating a fault text on the display and activate the common fault
message, switching off the inverter. The fault text is displayed only if presently no
message with higher priority is acute (e.g. another fault message). Within the range of
faults Fault 1 has the lowest priority and Fault 12 the highest. Moreover, an entry is
made in the event memory.
In case of a warning, in line 1 of the LCD always the text "FAULT" is shown,
complemented by the system if necessary (high-performance devices are set up by
connecting several low-performance power sections (systems) in parallel. In order to
be able to localize faults or warnings precisely, the text is complemented by the
system no. in case of faults or warnings). In case of programmable faults it is possible
to determine by the System-parameter, which system information shall be displayed (0
= no system information).
The text for line 2 can be selected separately. There is a selection of standardized
texts and of programmable texts. The programmable texts can be modified only with
the PC-program IMS via the serial interface of the inverter. Already stored texts
however can be selected as fault texts by means of the keypad.
For the activation of a fault the bit signals of the bit-pool are available.

11944
P-failure 1
Input 1423 Selection of the signal source for fault 1. Faults are indicated in two lines on the status display
(call via Bit-functionality), provided no fault of higher priority is actually signalled. In the first line is
always "!! Fault !!“, the text in the second line can be selected. In case of a fault, always the
internal bit "Comm.fault“ is set, the inverter disconnects electronically, LED and relay "Fault" is
getting active.

T 1435 Text for fault 1. The text for the fault can be chosen from a selection of standardized texts or
from the parameterizable individual texts.

System 1447 Indication of the system, if required.

11945
P-failure 2
15474
… P-failure 16
dito dito

15024
P-SERVICE MODULE
Channel1 185 Selection of the signal which is indicated with the actual value "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val.
Inv.:User act.1".

C1 Amplifi. 186 No external relevance.

C1 Address 1014 If in parameter "Channel1" the value "Address" is selected, the signal internally stored on this
address of the uP is indicated in "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val. Inv.:User act.1".

C1 format 1043 Setting of the desired number format for the display of parameter "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec.
Val. Inv.:User act.1" on the LCD.

Channel2 187 Selection of the signal which is indicated with the actual value "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val.
Inv.:User act.2".

C2 Address 1015 If in parameter "Channel2" the value "Address" is selected, the signal internally stored on this
address of the uP is indicated in "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val. Inv.:User act.2".

C2 format 1044 Setting of the desired number format for the display of parameter "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec.
Val. Inv.:User act.2" on the LCD.

Channel3 189 Selection of the signal which is indicated with the actual value "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val.
Inv.:User act.3".

136
SINAMICS G180

C3 Address 1016 If in parameter "Channel3" the value "Address" is selected, the signal internally stored on this
address of the uP is indicated in "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val. Inv.:User act.3".

C3 format 1045 Setting of the desired number format for the display of parameter "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec.
Val. Inv.:User act.3" on the LCD.

Channel4 191 Selection of the signal which is indicated with the actual value "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val.
Inv.:User act.4".

C4 Address 1017 If in parameter "Channel4" the value "Address" is selected, the signal internally stored on this
address of the uP is indicated in "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val. Inv.:User act.4".

C4 format 1046 Setting of the desired number format for the display of parameter "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec.
Val. Inv.:User act.4" on the LCD.

Channel5 2579 Selection of the signal which is indicated with the actual value "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val.
Inv.:User act.5".

C5 Address 2587 If in parameter "Channel5" the value "Address" is selected, the signal internally stored on this
address of the uP is indicated in "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val. Inv.:User act.5".

C5 format 2591 Setting of the desired number format for the display of parameter "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec.
Val. Inv.:User act.5" on the LCD.

Channel6 2581 Selection of the signal which is indicated with the actual value "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val.
Inv.:User act.6".

C6 Address 2588 If in parameter "Channel6" the value "Address" is selected, the signal internally stored on this
address of the uP is indicated in "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val. Inv.:User act.6".

C6 format 2592 Setting of the desired number format for the display of parameter "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec.
Val. Inv.:User act.6" on the LCD.

Channel7 2583 Selection of the signal which is indicated with the actual value "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val.
Inv.:User act.7".

C7 Address 2589 If in parameter "Channel7" the value "Address" is selected, the signal internally stored on this
address of the uP is indicated in "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val. Inv.:User act.7".

C7 format 2593 Setting of the desired number format for the display of parameter "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec.
Val. Inv.:User act.7" on the LCD.

Channel8 2585 Selection of the signal which is indicated with the actual value "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val.
Inv.:User act.8".

C8 Address 2590 If in parameter "Channel8" the value "Address" is selected, the signal internally stored on this
address of the uP is indicated in "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec. Val. Inv.:User act.8".

C8 format 2594 Setting of the desired number format for the display of parameter "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec.
Val. Inv.:User act.8" on the LCD.

137
SINAMICS G180

Addr. DSP 1 1018 If in parameter "Channel1" ... "Channel4" the value "Adr. DSP 1" or "Adr. DSP 2" is selected, the
signal internally stored on this address of the DSP is indicated in "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec.
Val. Inv.:User act.1 ... 4".

Addr. DSP 2 1019 If in parameter "Channel1" ... "Channel4" the value "Adr. DSP 1" or "Adr. DSP 2" is selected, the
signal internally stored on this address of the DSP is indicated in "I-INVERTER DATA/I-spec.
Val. Inv.:User act.1 ... 4".

11925
P-CONTROL PARAMETER
PI-Regler
Verstärkung P, Nachstellzeit Tn

2*P*x
x y
P*x

Tn

FOC: Motortyp= async_FOC (field-orientated control); SVC: Motortyp= async_SVC (Space-Vector Control)
SYN: Motortyp= sync
SVC P T-ctr.SVC 3746 Proportional component of the master controller for torque or power rating with Space-Vector-
control ("Motor type = async_SVC").

SVC Tr T-ctr.SVC 3747 Reset time of the master controller for torque or power rating with Space-Vector- control ("Motor
type = async_SVC").

Smooth.T-act 8248 This parameter is relevant only in the operating mode Torque Control. It defines the smoothing
of the actual value of torque for the overlaid torque controller.

SVC P T-ctr.SVC 4051 P-component of the torque controller witha motor type equalling async_SVC.
Normally, no modifications are needed!
Caution: any changing of set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

SVC Tr T-ctr.SVC 4052 Resetting time of torque controller with motor type equalling async_SVC.
Normally, no modifications are needed!
Caution: any changing of set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

SVC KD T-ctr.SVC 4053 D-component of torque controller with a motor type equalling async_SVC.
Normally, no modifications are needed!
Caution: any changing of set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

SVC TD T-ctr.SVC 4054 The time-constant D-component of the torque controller with a motor type equalling async_SVC..
Normally, no modifications are needed!
Caution: any changing of set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

SVC P T-lim.SVC 2179 Here you are setting the P-portion of the torque limiting controller. The torque limiting controller
becomes active if SVC-control (motor type = asnch_SVC) and limiting function (P-SPEED
DEFAULT/P-limit for n, P-M-CONTROL/P-limit for n) are activated to "torque".

SVC Tr T-lim.SVC 2180 Here you are setting the Tn-portion of the torque limiting controller. The torque limiting controller
becomes active if SVC-control (motor type = asnch_SVC) and limiting function (P-SPEED
DEFAULT/P-limit for n, P-M-CONTROL/P-limit for T) are activated to "torque".

FOC/ P I-ctr. 1004 P-component (amplification) of the current controller.


SVC Normally no changes are needed! Parameterizing only if no acceptable result can be achieved
/ with the speed controller.
SYN Attention: change of set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

138
SINAMICS G180

FOC/ Tr I-ctr. 1005 Readjustment time (I-component) of the current controller.


SVC Normally this time does not need to be changed. Changes only in exceptional cases, if e.g. no
/ good result can be achieved with the amplification "P I-ctr." (P I-controller).
SYN Generally: increased time would slow down the current control circuit.
Attention: change of set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

P I-neg.MSC 3614 P-component for the machine-side negative-sequence control (e.g. for the regulation of
asymmetric e.m.f. in case of synchronous machines). If P I-neg.MSC is parameterized to 0 and I-
neg.MSC to 9999, the machine-side negative-sequence control is switched off.

Tr I-neg.MSC 3615 Resetting time for the machine-side negative-sequence control (e.g. for the regulation of
asymmetric e.m.f. in case of synchronous machines). If P I-neg.MSC is parameterized to 0 and I-
neg.MSC to 9999, the machine-side negative-sequence control is switched off.

P Fd.w.FOC 8203 P-component (amplification) of the field weakening controller in case of asynchronous machine
with field-oriented control (Motor type = asyn_FOC).
Attention: any modification of the set parameters should be coordinated with the factory !

Tr Fd.w.FOC 8204 Readjustment time (I-component) of the field weakening controller in case of asynchronous
machine with field-oriented control (Motor type = asyn_FOC).
Attention: any modification of the set parameters should be coordinated with the factory !

KD Fd.w.FOC 8205 P-component (amplification) of differentiator of the field weakening controller in case of
asynchronous machine with field-oriented control (Motor type = asyn_FOC).
Attention: any modification of the set parameters should be coordinated with the factory !

TD Fd.w.FOC 8206 Readjustment time (I-component) of differentiator of the field weakening controller in case of
asynchronous machine with field-oriented control (Motor type = asyn_FOC).
Attention: any modification of the set parameters should be coordinated with the factory !

FOC/ P I-ctr.R1 2672 This parameter defines the proportional component of the current controller upon autotuning.
SVC
/
SYN

FOC/ Tr I-ctr.R1 2673 This parameter defines the resetting time of the current controller upon autotuning.
SVC
/
SYN

FOC/ P I-ctr.syn 3740 This parameter defines the proportional component of the current controller upon synchronizing.
SVC
/
SYN

FOC/ Tr I-ctr.syn 2675 This parameter defines the resetting time of the current controller upon synchronizing.
SVC
/
SYN

I De-excite 8281 Parameter for setting that current theshold below which the machine is considered as de-
excited.
Attention: Any modification of the set parameter is allowed only in coordination with the factory!

I-Act syn 8229 Value of regenerative active current for the recognition of the synchronous point.

139
SINAMICS G180

delta-f Syn 8230 Frequency hopping (as a multiple of the rated slip) after the synchronous point was found.

P I-ctr.pos 1006 P-component (amplification) of current controller in case of position control:


The same boundary conditions as with the "P I-ctr." (P I-controller) are applying (about the
same values should be set there).
Attention: change of set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

Tr I-ctr.pos 1007 Readjustment time of the current controller in case of position control. Normally this time does
not need to be changed. Changes only in exceptional cases. The same boundary conditions as
with the "Tr I-ctr." (Tr I-controller) are applying (about the same values should be set there).
Attention: change of set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

SVC P I-ctr.add 2236 In special cases the tendency of the motor to oscillate can be influenced.

Damping LHF 8282 In special cases it is possible with this parameter to attenuate the hunting tendency of the DC-
link voltage in connection with a "Line Harmonic Filter" (LHF).
Attention: Any modification of the set parameters needs consultation with the factory!

SVC P I-lim.mot 3748 Amplification of the motive current-limit controller.


The setting is correct if in motor operation the output current does not oscillate remarkably over
the actual current-limit (s. actual value for the actual limitting current "I-limit") and if the frequency
at the motive current-limit does not fluctuate to much.

SVC Tr I-lim.mot 3749 Readjustment time of the motive current-limit contoller.


Can be reduced at the motive current-limit to optimize the behaviour , if required. (Shorter
readjustment time = faster controlling behaviour, but higher incliniation to oscillate).

SVC P I-lim.gen 3752 Amplification of the generative current-limit controller.


The setting is correct if in generator operation the output current does not oscillate remarkably
over the actual current-limit (s. actual value for the actual limitting current "I-limit") and if the
frequency at the generative current-limit does not fluctuate to much.

SVC Tr I-lim.gen 3753 Readjustment time of the generative current-limit contoller.


Can be reduced at the generative current-limit to optimize the behaviour , if required. (Shorter
readjustment time = faster controlling behaviour, but higher incliniation to oscillate).

FOC/ P DC-lim. 1538 Amplification of the voltage limitation controller.


SVC Changes should be done only after contacting the service department of the Siemens company!

FOC/ Tr DC-lim. 1539 Readjustment time of the voltage limitation controller.


SVC Changes should be done only after contacting the service department of the Siemens company!

I Flux cntr 8277 I-component of flow controller for oversaturation control on deceleration. With value 99.99s the
controller is switched off, i.e. during deceleration no oversaturation will be occurring.

SYN P Mbuff-ctr 3741 This parameter defines the proportional component of the controller in case of dynamic line
buffers.

SYN Tr Mbuff-ctr 2669 This parameter defines the resetting time of the controller in case of dynamic line buffers.

SYN D Mbuff-ctr 3742 This parameter defines the differential component (D-component) of the controller in case of
dynamic line buffers.

SYN P Mbuff-act 3743 This parameter defines the proportional component of the active-current controller in case of
dynamic line buffers.

SYN Tr Mbuff-act 3744 This parameter defines the resetting time of the active-current controller in case of dynamic line
buffers.

SYN D Mbuff-act 2667 This parameter defines the differential component (D-component) of the active-current controller
in case of dynamic line buffers.

SYN P Mbuff.add 3745 This parameter defines the proportional component of the supplementary controller in case of
dynamic line buffers.

140
SINAMICS G180

SVC P Iact-ctr. 3750 Amplification of the active current controller.


Changes should be done only after contacting the service department of the Siemens company!

SVC Tr Iact-ctr. 3751 Readjustment time of the active current controller.


Changes should be done only after contacting the service department of the Siemens company!

SYN P phase ctr 2489 Relevant only in control mode = "Mains syn".
Setting of the proportional component "P proportion" of the phase controller.
Normally are no changes required!
Attention: readjustment of the set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

SYN Tr phase ctr 2490 Relevant only in control mode = "Mains syn".
Setting of the integral-action component "I proportion" of the phase controller.
Normally are no changes required!
Attention: readjustment of the set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

SYN Angular diff. 2492 Relevant only in control mode = "Mains syn".
Compensation of the angle difference caused by the line reactor at the inverter output.
Normally are no changes required!
Attention: readjustment of the set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

SYN max.ang.diff. 2491 Relevant only in control mode = "Mains syn".


Setting of the maximum angle difference between line voltage and inverter output voltage for
mains synchronization.
Normally are no changes required!
Attention: readjustment of the set parameters should be coordinated with the factory!

T1 n-act 1073 By this parameterization the smoothing of the value of actual speed in "lower" speed ranges
resp. output frequencies can be performed (range "0 ... f T1/T2, see also parameter "f T1/T2").

T2 n-act 1074 By this parameterization the smoothing of the value of actual speed in "higher" speed ranges
resp. output frequencies can be performed (range "f T1/T2 ... maximum frequency", see also
parameter "f T1/T2").

f T1/T2 1075 Setting of the "change-over threshold" (change-over frequency) for the parameterization of
smoothing of the actual speed value. Below this parameterized frequency the smoothing-time
constant for "T1 n-act" applies, above that for "T2 n-act".

SYN T Compensation 1077 For compensation resp. counteraction in case of possibly extant "torque discontinuity" (ripple
torque) with synchronous drives. No consequences with asynchronous drives.
Attention! The sdame effect occurs with too high values, as with extant ripple torques
themselves!

SYN T Comp.Angle 2070 By this parameter the angle offset of the compensation signal "T compensation" to the
fundamental oscillation is set.

SYN T Comp.Ordinal 2071 By this parameter the ordinal number of the compensation signal "T compensation" is set.

P br.chopp 3900 P-portion of brake chopper for the intermediate-circuit voltage

Tr br.chopp 3901 Resetting time of brake chopper for the intermediate-circuit voltage

P P-lim.br. 3997 P-portion (amplification) of the power limiting controller for the braking direction.

P V-PosNeg 4050 Parameter for setting the amplification for the snychronization of the positive-sequence
component and the negative-sequence component of the voltage detection for LVRT/HVRT.
Normally, no modifications are needed!
Caution: any changing of set parameters should be coordinated with the factory !

11876
P-STATUS DISPLAY
Status-Z1 1030 Hereby, desired "status indications" (selectable actual value parameters) can be parameterized
to the LCD of the inverter.

Status-Z2 1031 Hereby, desired "status indications" (selectable actual value parameters) can be parameterized
to the LCD of the inverter.

Status-Z3 1032 Hereby, desired "status indications" (selectable actual value parameters) can be parameterized
to the LCD of the inverter.

Status-Z4 1033 Hereby, desired "status indications" (selectable actual value parameters) can be parameterized
to the LCD of the inverter.

141
SINAMICS G180

Annex: Choices

Survey of messages, that can be assigned to a parameterizable binary output:


ATTENTION: Not all messages are available at the (for example) binary outputs. Here, you will find only a
list of all messages. Which messages are available at which place is shown in the IMS-software.

inactive Deactivation of a command. Depending on the command this can mean a logical 0 or 1.
always permanent activation of an operating action
LOW For the connection of a logical linkage with 0
HIGH For the connection of a logical linkage with 1
X2:8-16,27-29 Terminal inputs at the control electronics.
X81:1-5 M1-7 Terminal inputs at the Signals-PCB (cabinet-mount devices only)
X81:13-14 M1-7 Terminal inputs at the Signals-PCB (cabinet-mount devices only)
X2:18-26 Terminal inputs at the Peripheral-PCB 2/4 (option)
ON internal ON-key at internal keypad.
OFF intern. OFF-key at internal keypad. OFF-key pressed corresponds with logical 0.
ResetIntern Reset function at internal keypad (S+I simultaneously pressed).
ON ext.Ctrl ON-key at external keypad
OFF extCtrl OFF-key at external keypad. OFF-key pressed corresponds with logical 0.
Res.extCTRL Reset function at external keypad (S+I simultaneously pressed).
bit change Toogle-monitoring of the CAN-Bus (Option)
Selfholdg 1-5 Output signal of self-holding 1 to 5
Linkage 1-8 Output signal of linkage 1 to 8
STW1 Bit11-15 Profibus control word 1 Bit 11 to Bit 15
STW2 Bit0-15 Profibus control wordt 2 Bit 0 to Bit 15
IMS Fkt. 1-2 Bit of both control keys of the IMS FI-monitor (as from IMS-version N13)
Messg. 2Output signal of message generator MESS 1 to MESS 20
Messg. Output signal of message generator COMP1 to COMP8
Rdy f. ON The FI is in ready-for-start condition.
Rdy.f.work The FI is in ready-for-operation condition.
Rel.f.work The FI is in released-for-operation condition .
Working The FI is in operational conditiond .
SwOnInhib. The FI is in start-inhibited condition .
Off An OFF 1 is just active.
Emerg. Stop An emergency stop is just active and/or the FI in start-inhibited condition as the consequence of an
emergency stop.
OFF 2 An OFF2 is just active and/or the FI in start-inhibited condition as the consequence of an OFF2
command.
ContRelease Command controller release is active (but might not be carried out yet).
Speed on Command speed ON is active (but might not be carried out yet).
Reset Reset just being carried out (e.g. by pressing key S+I on the internal keypad).
Reset OFF1 Reset signal for self-holding (operating command = OFF1).
ResRelease Reset signal for self-holding (operating command = ContRelease).
ResetSpeed Reset signal for self-holding (operating command = Speed on).
Reset LSC Reset signal for self-holding (operating command = LSC on).
Switched ON Only the rectifier (LSC) is started (e.g. for reactive power compensation), inverter (MSC) is switched off
Synchron. The drive synchronizes to the rotating motor
SetV=ActV The drive has reached the preset setpoint value.
SetV><ActV Inverted signal from SetV=ActV.
DriveBlockg If n = 0 and current limit is reached.
DrivRunning If setpoint value > starting frequency and all ON-commands are set and f > motor slip
Speed zero Inverted signal from drive is running
CntrVal got If current or voltage limitting controller in action.
GeneratorOp Regenerative operation
Motor rot. During the preparatory time of the inverter after an ON command and when the FI is clocking.
Mains off The FI is in mains-off condition.
MainCntctr Triggering signal for a main contactor.
Mech.Brake Triggering signal for a mechanical brake.
Fan on Internal fans are engaged (high speed).
E mA AE 1 Input signal of AE1 is below the parameterized monitoring threshold
E mA AE 2 Input signal of AE2 is below the parameterized monitoring threshold
E mA AE M1-7 Input signal of AE of the Signals-PCB, system 1(-7) is below the parameterized monitoring threshold

Bypass The FI indicates a fault; exceptions are: undervoltage, phase failure or a parameterized failure.

AC-Schz. collective signal: One AC-contactor is activated


AC-Schz.-M1-7 control signal for AC-contactor at motorsided system 1…7
DC-Schz.-M1-7 control signal for DC-contactor at motorsided system 1…7
VL-Schz. collective signal: One pre charging-contactor is activated
VL-Schz.-M1-7 control signal for pre charging contactor at motorsided system 1…7
I-asym. Current-asymetry on the motor side, e.g. usable for phase-failure recognition.
Exc.pulse Input signal of the pulse input is below the parameterized monitoring threshold
No OFF2 OFF2 negated
No OFF3 OFF3 (emergency off) negated
Control BUS The inverter is controlled via a bus system (rated value and operation)
PowFan low/ Bit for slow speed control of power unit fans
PowFan fast Bit for fast speed control of power unit fans
CabFan low/ Bit for slow speed control of cabinet fans
CabFan fast Bit for fast speed control of cabinet fans
CabHeat.ON Bit for control of cabinet heating

142
SINAMICS G180

H2OHeat.ON Bit for control of cooling water heating


Soll><Ist-N setvalue is different to actual value at mains side
Air.circ.ON Bit for control of fan at cabinet heating, that the heating circulated inside the cabinet.
LVRT/HVRT inverter in under-/overvoltage operation because of mains under- or overvoltage
SysActiv-M1-7 Only for redundance operation: system M1…M7 is actual in operation
Regelgr.NSR control limit at mains side reached (depending on parametrization is limit for reactive power or phi reached)
Master Shows mastersystem (1=mastersystem, 0=slavesystem)
RM AC-SchzM Recsponce control from AC-contactor at motor side
RM AC-SchzN Recsponce control from AC-contactor at mains side
RM DC Schz. Recsponce control from DC-contactor
HVRT inverter in overvoltage operation because of mains overvoltage
LVRT inverter in undervoltage operation because of mains undervoltage
Pufferung inverter in buffering operation. This means supply from DC-circuit, mains in undervoltage
BUS general Communication to BUS disconnected
BUS source Communication to BUS disconnected and at the same time setpoint source or operation source parameterized from the BUS.

RS485 gen. Communication to the external display disconnected at the RS485.


RS485Source Communication to the external display disconnected at the RS485 and at the same time setpoint source or operation source
parameterized from the ext. display.
BUS Offline Communication to BUS disconnected
X26 gen. Communication to the external display disconnected at the terminal -X26.
X26 source Communication to the external display disconnected at the terminal -X26 and at the same time setpoint source or operation
source parameterized from the ext. display.
No warning There is no warning active (common warning).
Warning There is an active warning (common warning).
Wrg>RFlt M1-7 Temperature of the filter resistor System 1(-7) too high.
Wrg>AD.2 M1 Temperature of output reactor 2 System 1(-7) too high.
-7
Wrg>ED.2 M1 Temperature of input reactor 2 System 1(-7) too high.
-7
Wrg>InvExTe Warning inverter over-temperature

PTC X2:27 A thermistor connected to terminal X2:27 has tripped.


PTC X2:28 A thermistor connected to terminal X2:28 has tripped.
EarthCurr. The admissible parameterized earth current has been exceeded.
Note: only possible with optional differential current measuring.
Flt>Mains Mains failure (as long as function t-restart is active there is no output of a failure)
Wrg>R-Brake A brake resistor is under heavy thermic load, e.g. owing to multiple braking actions

Wrg Syn MSR warning: pulse pattern synchronisation at motorside and grouping mode
PTC AE 1 A thermistor connected to AE1 has tripped.
PTC AE 2 A thermistor connected to AE2 has tripped.
Wrg Syn NSR warning: pulse pattern synchronisation at mainsside and grouping mode
Stg>Lft.-M fault inverterfans at motorsystem
gen.Bit 1-20 output of P-Bitgenerator 1-20
M-Aus.Rampe inverter is switched off and is in bracking mode via torque ramp
SW begrenzt begrenzter Sollwert (siehe auch Kapitel Begrenzungsfunktion)
Netzsynchr. Ansteuersignal für ein Netzschütz bei Regelart Netz-Syn.
PTCX3:92/93 A thermistor connected to the PTC-input -X3:92/93, Peripheral-PCB, has tripped.
Fault There is a failure occuring (common fault).
Flt>Fan-M Monitoring device for fan (if provided) has tripped.
Flt>MainsPh The phase failure monitoring device has tripped.
PTC X3:90 A thermistor connected to the PTC-input -X3:90/91, Peripheral-PCB, has tripped.
Mains fault After switching on the main contactor no voltage builds up.
Safe halt An opening contact for safe halt connected to input -X3:17/18, Peripheral-PCB has opened.
active Permanent activation of a command.

143
Index

C
Contacts, 77

M
More information, 77

O
On-site service, 77

S
Service Center
Ruhstorf, 77
Spare parts, 77, 78

T
Technical support, 77
Technical Support, 77

SINAMICS G180 6SE01??0


List Manual 09/2017

144
Further Information

www.siemens.com/drives

Siemens AG
Process Industries and Drives
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY

145

You might also like